Adaptive loop filtering between different video units

ABSTRACT

An example method of video processing includes determining, for a conversion between a current video unit of a video and a bitstream representation of the video, availability of one or more samples in a first neighboring region of the current block for a coding process of the conversion independently from information of a second neighboring region of the current block. The second neighboring region is adjacent to the first neighboring region, and the one or more samples are padded in case determined to be unavailable. The method includes performing the conversion based on the determining.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of International Patent Application No. PCT/CN2020/118029, filed on Sep. 27, 2020, which claims the priority to and benefits of International Patent Application No. PCT/CN2019/108763, filed on Sep. 27, 2019. All the aforementioned patent applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.

TECHNICAL FIELD

This patent document is directed generally to video coding and decoding technologies.

BACKGROUND

Video coding standards have evolved primarily through the development of the well-known ITU-T and ISO/IEC standards. The ITU-T produced H.261 and H.263, ISO/IEC produced MPEG-1 and MPEG-4 Visual, and the two organizations jointly produced the H.262/MPEG-2 Video and H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding (AVC) and H.265/High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standards. Since H.262, the video coding standards are based on the hybrid video coding structure wherein temporal prediction plus transform coding are utilized. To explore the future video coding technologies beyond HEVC, Joint Video Exploration Team (JVET) was founded by VCEG and MPEG jointly in 2015. Since then, many new methods have been adopted by JVET and put into the reference software named Joint Exploration Model (JEM). In April 2018, the JVET between VCEG (Q6/16) and ISO/IEC JTC1 SC29/WG11 (MPEG) was created to work on the next generation Versatile Video Coding (VVC) standard targeting at 50% bitrate reduction compared to HEVC.

SUMMARY

Using the disclosed video coding, transcoding or decoding techniques, embodiments of video encoders or decoders can handle virtual boundaries of coding tree blocks to provide better compression efficiency and simpler implementations of coding or decoding tools.

In one example aspect, a method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes determining, for a conversion between a current video unit of a video and a bitstream representation of the video, availability of one or more samples in a first neighboring region of the current block for a coding process of the conversion independently from information of a second neighboring region of the current block. The second neighboring region is adjacent to the first neighboring region, and the one or more samples are padded in case determined to be unavailable. The coding process comprises an adaptive loop filter (ALF) tool that comprises an ALF classification process and/or an ALF filtering process. The method also includes performing the conversion based on the determining.

In another example aspect, a method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes determining, for a conversion between a current video unit of a video that and a bitstream representation of the video, that at least one sample in K regions is unavailable for a filtering operation in case (1) M of K representative samples in the K regions are in video units different than the current video unit, and (2) the filtering operation is disallowed to access samples across multiple video units of the video, where M and K are integers. The method also includes performing the conversion based on the determining.

In another example aspect, a method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes performing a conversion between a video comprising video pictures comprising a video unit and a bitstream representation of the video. A first set of syntax elements is included in the bitstream representation to indicate whether samples across boundaries of the video unit are accessible in a filtering process applicable to boundaries of the video unit, and the first set of syntax elements are included in different levels.

In another example aspect, a method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes making a first determination, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream representation of the video, about whether a sample in a neighboring block of the current block is in a same video region as the current block. The neighboring block is located (1) above and to the left of the current block, (2) above and to the right of the current block, (3) below and to the right of the current block, or (4) below and to the right of the current block. The method also includes using the first determination to make a second determination about applicability of a coding tool that uses samples outside the current block to the conversion of the current block and performing the conversion according to the first determination and the second determination.

In another example aspect, a method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes performing a conversion between video blocks of a video picture and a bitstream representation thereof. Here, the video blocks are processed using logical groupings of coding tree blocks and the coding tree blocks are processed based on whether a bottom boundary of a bottom coding tree block is outside a bottom boundary of the video picture.

In another example aspect, another video processing method is disclosed. The method includes determining, based on a condition of a coding tree block of a current video block, a usage status of virtual samples during an in-loop filtering and performing a conversion between the video block and a bitstream representation of the video block consistent with the usage status of virtual samples.

In yet another example aspect, another video processing method is disclosed. The method includes determining, during a conversion between a video picture that is logically grouped into one or more video slices or video bricks, and a bitstream representation of the video picture, to disable a use of samples in another slice or brick in the adaptive loop filter process and performing the conversion consistent with the determining.

In yet another example aspect, another video processing method is disclosed. The method includes determining, during a conversion between a current video block of a video picture and a bitstream representation of the current video block, that the current video block includes samples located at a boundary of a video unit of the video picture and performing the conversion based on the determining, wherein the performing the conversion includes generating virtual samples for an in-loop filtering process using a unified method that is same for all boundary types in the video picture.

In yet another example aspect, another method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes determining to apply, during a conversion between a current video block of a video picture and a bitstream representation thereof, one of multiple adaptive loop filter (ALF) sample selection methods available for the video picture during the conversion and performing the conversion by applying the one of multiple ALF sample selection methods.

In yet another example aspect, another method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule disables using samples that cross a virtual pipeline data unit (VPDU) of the video picture and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

In yet another example aspect, another method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule specifies to use, for locations of the current video block across a video unit boundary, samples that are generated without using padding and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

In yet another example aspect, another method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule specifies selecting, for the in-loop filtering operation, a filter having dimensions such that samples of current video block used during the in-loop filtering do not cross a boundary of a video unit of the video picture and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

In yet another example aspect, another method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule specifies selecting, for the in-loop filtering operation, clipping parameters or filter coefficients based on whether or not padded samples are needed for the in-loop filtering and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

In yet another example aspect, another method of video processing is disclosed. The method includes performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule depends on a color component identity of the current video block and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

In yet another example aspect, a video encoding apparatus configured to perform an above-described method is disclosed.

In yet another example aspect, a video decoder that is configured to perform an above-described method is disclosed.

In yet another example aspect, a machine-readable medium is disclosed. The medium stores code which, upon execution, causes a processor to implement one or more of the above-described methods.

The above and other aspects and features of the disclosed technology are described in greater detail in the drawings, the description and the claims.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 shows an example of a picture with 18 by 12 luma coding tree units CTUs that is partitioned into 12 tiles and 3 raster-scan slices.

FIG. 2 shows an example of a picture with 18 by 12 luma CTUs that is partitioned into 24 tiles and 9 rectangular slices.

FIG. 3 shows an example of a picture that is partitioned into 4 tiles, 11 bricks, and 4 rectangular slices.

FIG. 4A shows an example of coding tree blocks CTBs crossing picture borders when K=M, L<N.

FIG. 4B shows an example of coding tree blocks CTBs crossing picture borders when K<M, L=N.

FIG. 4C shows an example of coding tree blocks CTBs crossing picture borders when K<M, L<N.

FIG. 5 shows an example of encoder block diagram.

FIG. 6 is an illustration of picture samples and horizontal and vertical block boundaries on the 8×8 grid, and the nonoverlapping blocks of the 8×8 samples, which can be deblocked in parallel.

FIG. 7 shows examples of pixels involved in filter on/off decision and strong/weak filter selection.

FIG. 8 shows four 1-D directional patterns.

FIG. 9 shows examples of geometric adaptive loop filtering (GALF) filter shapes (left: 5×5 diamond, middle: 7×7 diamond, right: 9×9 diamond).

FIG. 10 shows relative coordinates for the 5×5 diamond filter support.

FIG. 11 shows examples of relative coordinates for the 5×5 diamond filter support.

FIG. 12A shows an example arrangement for subsampled Laplacian calculations.

FIG. 12B shows another example arrangement for subsampled Laplacian calculations.

FIG. 12C shows another example arrangement for subsampled Laplacian calculations.

FIG. 12D shows yet another example arrangement for subsampled Laplacian calculations.

FIG. 13 shows an example of a loop filter line buffer requirement in VTM-4.0 for Luma component.

FIG. 14 shows an example of a loop filter line buffer requirement in VTM-4.0 for Chroma component.

FIG. 15A shows an example of ALF block classification at virtual boundary when N=4.

FIG. 15B shows another example of ALF block classification at virtual boundary when N=4.

FIG. 16A illustrate an example of modified luma ALF filtering at virtual boundary.

FIG. 16B illustrate another example of modified luma ALF filtering at virtual boundary.

FIG. 16C illustrate yet another example of modified luma ALF filtering at virtual boundary.

FIG. 17A shows an example of modified chroma ALF filtering at virtual boundary.

FIG. 17B shows another example of modified chroma ALF filtering at virtual boundary.

FIG. 18A shows an example of horizontal wrap around motion compensation.

FIG. 18B shows another example of horizontal wrap around motion compensation.

FIG. 19 illustrates an example of a modified adaptive loop filter.

FIG. 20 shows example of processing CTUs in a video picture.

FIG. 21 shows an example of a modified adaptive loop filter boundary.

FIG. 22 is a block diagram of an example of a video processing apparatus.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart for an example method of video processing.

FIG. 24 shows an example of an image of HEC in 3×2 layout.

FIG. 25 shows an example of number of padded lines for samples of two kinds of boundaries.

FIG. 26 shows an example of processing of CTUs in a picture.

FIG. 27 shows another example of processing of CTUs in a picture.

FIG. 28 shows another example of current sample and samples to be required to be accessed.

FIG. 29 shows another example of padding of “unavailable” neighboring samples.

FIG. 30 shows an example of samples need to be utilized in ALF classification process.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of an example video processing system in which disclosed techniques may be implemented.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart representation of a method for video processing in accordance with the present technology.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart representation of another method for video processing in accordance with the present technology.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram that illustrates an example video coding system.

FIG. 35 is a block diagram that illustrates an encoder in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram that illustrates a decoder in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Section headings are used in the present document to facilitate ease of understanding and do not limit the embodiments disclosed in a section to only that section. Furthermore, while certain embodiments are described with reference to Versatile Video Coding or other specific video codecs, the disclosed techniques are applicable to other video coding technologies also. Furthermore, while some embodiments describe video coding steps in detail, it will be understood that corresponding steps decoding that undo the coding will be implemented by a decoder. Furthermore, the term video processing encompasses video coding or compression, video decoding or decompression and video transcoding in which video pixels are represented from one compressed format into another compressed format or at a different compressed bitrate.

1. BRIEF SUMMARY

This document is related to video coding technologies. Specifically, it is related to picture/slice/tile/brick boundary and virtual boundary coding especially for the non-linear adaptive loop filter. It may be applied to the existing video coding standard like HEVC, or the standard (Versatile Video Coding) to be finalized. It may be also applicable to future video coding standards or video codec.

2. INITIAL DISCUSSION

Video coding standards have evolved primarily through the development of the well-known ITU-T and ISO/IEC standards. The ITU-T produced H.261 and H.263, ISO/IEC produced MPEG-1 and MPEG-4 Visual, and the two organizations jointly produced the H.262/MPEG-2 Video and H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding (AVC) and H.265/HEVC standards. Since H.262, the video coding standards are based on the hybrid video coding structure wherein temporal prediction plus transform coding are utilized. To explore the future video coding technologies beyond HEVC, Joint Video Exploration Team (JVET) was founded by VCEG and MPEG jointly in 2015. Since then, many new methods have been adopted by JVET and put into the reference software named Joint Exploration Model (JEM). In April 2018, the JVET between VCEG (Q6/16) and ISO/IEC JTC1 SC29/WG11 (MPEG) was created to work on the VVC standard targeting at 50% bitrate reduction compared to HEVC.

2.1 Color Space and Chroma Subsampling

Color space, also known as the color model (or color system), is an abstract mathematical model which simply describes the range of colors as tuples of numbers, typically as 3 or 4 values or color components (e.g. RGB). Basically speaking, color space is an elaboration of the coordinate system and sub-space.

For video compression, the most frequently used color spaces are YCbCr and RGB.

YCbCr, Y′CbCr, or Y Pb/Cb Pr/Cr, also written as YCBCR or Y′CBCR, is a family of color spaces used as a part of the color image pipeline in video and digital photography systems. Y′ is the luma component and CB and CR are the blue-difference and red-difference chroma components. Y′ (with prime) is distinguished from Y, which is luminance, meaning that light intensity is nonlinearly encoded based on gamma corrected RGB primaries.

Chroma subsampling is the practice of encoding images by implementing less resolution for chroma in formation than for luma information, taking advantage of the human visual system's lower acuity for color differences than for luminance.

2.1.1 Color Format 4:4:4

Each of the three Y′CbCr components have the same sample rate, thus there is no chroma subsampling. This scheme is sometimes used in high-end film scanners and cinematic post production.

2.1.2 Color Format 4:2:2

The two chroma components are sampled at half the sample rate of luma: the horizontal chroma resolution is halved. This reduces the bandwidth of an uncompressed video signal by one-third with little to no visual difference

2.1.3 Color Format 4:2:0

In 4:2:0, the horizontal sampling is doubled compared to 4:1:1, but as the Cb and Cr channels are only sampled on each alternate line in this scheme, the vertical resolution is halved. The data rate is thus the same. Cb and Cr are each subsampled at a factor of 2 both horizontally and vertically. There are three variants of 4:2:0 schemes, having different horizontal and vertical siting.

In MPEG-2, Cb and Cr are cosited horizontally. Cb and Cr are sited between pixels in the vertical direction (sited interstitially).

In JPEG/JFIF, 1261, and MPEG-1, Cb and Cr are sited interstitially, half-Way between alternate luma samples.

In 4:2:0 DV, Cb and Cr are co-sited in the horizontal direction. In the vertical direction, they are co-sited on alternating lines.

2.2 Various Video Units

A picture is divided into one or more tile rows and one or more tile columns. A tile is a sequence of CTUs that covers a rectangular region of a picture.

A tile is divided into one or more bricks, each of which consisting of a number of CTU rows within the tile.

A tile that is not partitioned into multiple bricks is also referred to as a brick. However, a brick that is a true subset of a tile is not referred to as a tile.

A slice either contains a number of tiles of a picture or a number of bricks of a tile.

Two modes of slices are supported, namely the raster-scan slice mode and the rectangular slice mode. In the raster-scan slice mode, a slice contains a sequence of tiles in a tile raster scan of a picture. In the rectangular slice mode, a slice contains a number of bricks of a picture that collectively form a rectangular region of the picture. The bricks within a rectangular slice are in the order of brick raster scan of the slice.

FIG. 1 shows an example of raster-scan slice partitioning of a picture, where the picture is divided into 12 tiles and 3 raster-scan slices.

FIG. 2 shows an example of rectangular slice partitioning of a picture, where the picture is divided into 24 tiles (6 tile columns and 4 tile rows) and 9 rectangular slices.

FIG. 3 shows an example of a picture partitioned into tiles, bricks, and rectangular slices, where the picture is divided into 4 tiles (2 tile columns and 2 tile rows), 11 bricks (the top-left tile contains 1 brick, the top-right tile contains 5 bricks, the bottom-left tile contains 2 bricks, and the bottom-right tile contain 3 bricks), and 4 rectangular slices.

2.2.1 CTU/CTB Sizes

In VVC, the CTU size, signaled in SPS by the syntax element log2_ctu_size_minus2, could be as small as 4×4. 7.3.2.3 Sequence parameter set RBSP syntax

Descriptor seq_parameter_set_rbsp( ) {  sps_decoding_parameter_set_id u(4)  sps_video_parameter_set_id u(4)  sps_max_sub_layers_minus1 u(3)  sps_reserved_zero_5bits u(5)  profile_tier_level( sps_max_sub_layers_minus1 )  gra_enabled_flag u(1)  sps_seq_parameter_set_id ue(v)  chroma_format_idc ue(v)  if( chroma_format_idc = = 3 )   separate_colour_plane_flag u(1)  pic_width_in_luma_samples ue(v)  pic_height_in_luma_samples ue(v)  conformance_window_flag u(1)  if( conformance_window_flag ) {   conf_win_left_offset ue(v)   conf_win_right_offset ue(v)   conf_win_top_offset ue(v)   conf_win_bottom_offset ue(v)  }  bit_depth_luma_minus8 ue(v)  bit_depth_chroma_minus8 ue(v)  log2_max_pic_order_cnt_lsb_minus4 ue(v)  sps_sub_layer_ordering_info_present_flag u(1)  for( i = ( sps_sub_layer_ordering_info_present_flag ? 0 : sps_max_sub_layers_minus1 );    i <= sps_max_sub_layers_minus1; i++ ) {   sps_max_dec_pic_buffering_minus1[ i ] ue(v)   sps_max_num_reorder_pics[ i ] ue(v)   sps_max_latency_increase_plus1[ i ] ue(v)  }  long_term_ref_pics_flag u(1)  sps_idr_rpl_present_flag u(1)  rpl1_same_as_rpl0_flag u(1)  for( i = 0; i < !rpl1_same_as_rpl0_flag ? 2 : 1; i++ ) {   num_ref_pic_lists_in_sps[ i ] ue(v)   for( j = 0; j < num_ref_pic_lists_in_sps[ i ]; j++)    ref_pic_list_struct( i, j )  }  qtbtt_dual_tree_intra_flag u(1)  log2_ctu_size_minus2 ue(v)  log2_min_luma_coding_block_size_minus2 ue(v)  partition_constraints_override_enabled_flag u(1)  sps_log2_diff_min_qt_min_cb_intra_slice_luma ue(v)  sps_log2_diff_min_qt_min_cb_inter_slice ue(v)  sps_max_mtt_hierarchy_depth_inter_slice ue(v)  sps_max_mtt_hierarchy_depth_intra_slice_luma ue(v)  if( sps_max_mtt_hierarchy_depth_intra_slice_luma != 0 ) {   sps_log2_diff_max_bt_min_qt_intra_slice_luma ue(v)   sps_log2_diff_max_tt_min_qt_intra_slice_luma ue(v)  }  if( sps_max_mtt_hierarchy_depth_inter_slices != 0 ) {   sps_log2_diff_max_bt_min_qt_inter_slice ue(v)   sps_log2_diff_max_tt_min_qt_inter_slice ue(v)  }  if( qtbtt_dual_tree_intra_flag ) {   sps_log2_diff_min_qt_min_cb_intra_slice_chroma ue(v)   sps_max_mtt_hierarchy_depth_intra_slice_chroma ue(v)   if ( sps_max_mtt_hierarchy_depth_intra_slice_chroma != 0 ) {    sps_log2_diff_max_bt_min_qt_intra_slice_chroma ue(v)    sps_log2_diff_max_tt_min_qt_intra_slice_chroma ue(v)   }  } ...  rbsp_trailing_bits( ) } log2_ctu_size_minus2 plus 2 specifies the luma coding tree block size of each CTU. log2_min_luma_coding_block_size_minus2 plus 2 specifies the minimum luma coding block size.

The variables CtbLog2SizeY, CtbSizeY, MinCbLog2SizeY, MinCbSizeY, MinTbLog2SizeY, MaxTbLog2SizeY, MinTbSizeY, MaxTbSizeY, PicWidthInCtbsY, PicHeightInCtbsY, PicSizeInCtbsY, PicWidthInMinCbsY, PicHeightInMinCbsY, PicSizeInMinCbsY, PicSizeInSamplesY, PicWidthInSamplesC and PicHeightInSamplesC are derived as follows: CtbLog2SizeY=log2_ctu_size_minus2+2  (7-9) CtbSizeY=1<<CtbLog2SizeY  (7-10) MinCbLog2SizeY=log2_min_luma_coding_bbck_size_minus2+2  (7-11) MinCbSizeY=1<<MinCbLog2SizeY  (7-12) MinTbLog2SizeY=2  (7-13) MaxTbLog2SizeY=6  (7-14) MinTbSizeY=1<<MinTbLog2SizeY  (7-15) MaxTbSizeY=1<<MaxTbLog2SizeY  (7-16) PicWidthInCtbsY=Ceil(pic_width_in_luma_samples÷CtbSizeY)  (7-17) PicHeightInCtbsY=Ceil(pic_height_in_luma_samples÷CtbSizeY)  (7-18) PicSizeInCtbsY=PicWidthInCtbsY*PicHeightInCtbsY  (7-19) PicWidthInMinCbsY=pic_width_in_luma_samples/MinCbSizeY  (7-20) PicHeightInMinCbsY=pic_height_in_luma_samples/MinCbSizeY  (7-21) PicSizeInMinCbsY=PicWidthInMinCbsY*PicHeightInMinCbsY  (7-22) PicSizeInSamplesY=pic_width_in_luma_samples*pic_height_in_luma_samplbs  (7-23) PicWidthInSamplesC=pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC  (7-24) PicHeightInSamplesC=pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC  (7-25)

2.2.2 CTUs in a Picture

Suppose the CTB/LCU size indicated by M×N (typically M is equal to N, as defined in HEVC/VVC), and for a CTB located at picture (or tile or slice or other kinds of types, picture border is taken as an example) border, K×L samples are within picture border wherein either K<M or L<N. For those CTBs as depicted in FIG. 4A-4C, the CTB size is still equal to M×N, however, the bottom boundary/right boundary of the CTB is outside the picture.

FIG. 4A shows CTBs crossing the bottom picture border. FIG. 4B shows CTBs crossing the right picture border. FIG. 4C shows CTBs crossing the right bottom picture border

FIGS. 4A-4C show examples of CTBs crossing picture borders, (a) K=M, L<N; (b) K<M, L=N; (c) K<M, L<N

2.3 Coding Flow of a Typical Video Codec

FIG. 5 shows an example of encoder block diagram of VVC, which contains three in-loop filtering blocks: deblocking filter (DF), sample adaptive offset (SAO) and ALF. Unlike DF, which uses predefined filters, SAO and ALF utilize the original samples of the current picture to reduce the mean square errors between the original samples and the reconstructed samples by adding an offset and by applying a finite impulse response (FIR) filter, respectively, with coded side information signaling the offsets and filter coefficients. ALF is located at the last processing stage of each picture and can be regarded as a tool trying to catch and fix artifacts created by the previous stages.

2.4 Deblocking Filter (DB)

The input of DB is the reconstructed samples before in-loop filters.

The vertical edges in a picture are filtered first. Then the horizontal edges in a picture are filtered with samples modified by the vertical edge filtering process as input. The vertical and horizontal edges in the CTBs of each CTU are processed separately on a coding unit basis. The vertical edges of the coding blocks in a coding unit are filtered starting with the edge on the left-hand side of the coding blocks proceeding through the edges towards the right-hand side of the coding blocks in their geometrical order. The horizontal edges of the coding blocks in a coding unit are filtered starting with the edge on the top of the coding blocks proceeding through the edges towards the bottom of the coding blocks in their geometrical order.

FIG. 6 is an illustration of picture samples and horizontal and vertical block boundaries on the 8×8 grid, and the nonoverlapping blocks of the 8×8 samples, which can be deblocked in parallel.

2.4.1. Boundary Decision

Filtering is applied to 8×8 block boundaries. In addition, it must be a transform block boundary or a coding subblock boundary (e.g., due to usage of Affine motion prediction, ATMVP). For those which are not such boundaries, filter is disabled.

2.4.1 Boundary Strength Calculation

For a transform block boundary/coding subblock boundary, if it is located in the 8×8 grid, it may be filterd and the setting of bS[xD_(i)][yD_(j)] (wherein [xD_(i)][yD_(j)] denotes the coordinate) for this edge is defined in Table 1 and Table 2, respectively.

TABLE 1 Boundary strength (when SPS IBC is disabled) Priority Conditions Y U V 5 At least one of the adjacent blocks is intra 2 2 2 4 TU boundary and at least one of the adjacent blocks 1 1 1 has non-zero transform coefficients 3 Reference pictures or number of MVs (1 for uni-prediction, 1 N/A N/A 2 for bi-prediction) of the adjacent blocks are different 2 Absolute difference between the motion vectors of same 1 N/A N/A reference picture that belong to the adjacent blocks is greater than or equal to one integer luma sample 1 Otherwise 0 0 0

TABLE 2 Boundary strength (when SPS IBC is enabled) Priority Conditions Y U V 8 At least one of the adjacent blocks is intra 2 2 2 7 TU boundary and at least one of the adjacent blocks 1 1 1 has non-zero transform coefficients 6 Prediction mode of adjacent blocks is different 1 (e.g., one is IBC, one is inter) 5 Both IBC and absolute difference between the motion 1 N/A N/A vectors that belong to the adjacent blocks is greater than or equal to one integer luma sample 4 Reference pictures or number of MVs (1 for uni-prediction, 1 N/A N/A 2 for bi-prediction) of the adjacent blocks are different 3 Absolute difference between the motion vectors of same 1 N/A N/A reference picture that belong to the adjacent blocks is greater than or equal to one integer luma sample 1 Otherwise 0 0 0

2.4.3 Deblocking Decision for Luma Component

The deblocking decision process is described in this sub-section.

FIG. 7 shows examples of pixels involved in filter on/off decision and strong/weak filter selection.

Wider-stronger luma filter is filters are used only if all the Condition 1, Condition 2 and Condition 3 are TRUE.

The condition 1 is the “large block condition”. This condition detects whether the samples at P-side and Q-side belong to large blocks, which are represented by the variable bSidePisLargeBlk and bSideQisLargeBlk respectively. The bSidePisLargeBlk and bSideQisLargeBlk are defined as follows.

-   -   bSidePisLargeBlk=((edge type is vertical and p₀ belongs to CU         with width>=32)∥(edge type is horizontal and p₀ belongs to CU         with height>=32))? TRUE: FALSE     -   bSideQisLargeBlk=((edge type is vertical and q₀ belongs to CU         with width>=32)∥(edge type is horizontal and q₀ belongs to CU         with height>=32))? TRUE: FALSE

Based on bSidePisLargeBlk and bSideQisLargeBlk, the condition 1 is defined as follows.

Condition 1=(bSidePisLargeBlk∥bSidePisLargeBlk)? TRUE: FALSE

Next, if Condition 1 is true, the condition 2 will be further checked. First, the following variables are derived:

-   -   dp0, dp3, dq0, dq3 are first derived as in HEVC     -   if (p side is greater than or equal to 32)         dp0=(dp0+Abs(p5₀−2*p4₀ +p3₀)+1)>>1         dp3=(dp3+Abs(p5₃−2*p4₃ +p3₃)+1)>>1     -   if (q side is greater than or equal to 32)         dq0=(dq0+Abs(q5₀−2*q4₀ +q3₀)+1)>>1         dq3=(dq3+Abs(q5₃−2*q4₃ +q3₃)+1)>>1

Condition 2=(d<β)? TRUE: FALSE

where d=dp0+dq0+dp3+dq3.

If Condition 1 and Condition 2 are valid, whether any of the blocks uses sub-blocks is further checked:

If (bSidePisLargeBlk)

-   -   {         -   If (mode block P==SUBBLOCKMODE)             -   Sp=5         -   else             -   Sp=7

}

else

-   -   Sp=3

If (bSideQisLargeBlk)

-   -   {         -   If (mode block Q==SUBBLOCKMODE)             -   Sq=5         -   else             -   Sq=7         -   }     -   else         -   Sq=3

Finally, if both the Condition 1 and Condition 2 are valid, the proposed deblocking method will check the condition 3 (the large block strong filter condition), which is defined as follows.

In the Condition 3 StrongFilterCondition, the following variables are derived:

dpq is derived as in HEVC.

sp₃=Abs(p₃−p₀), derived as in HEVC

if (p side is greater than or equal to 32)

-   -   if (Sp==5)         sp ₃=(sp ₃+Abs(p ₅ −p ₃)+1)>>1         else         sp ₃=(sp ₃+Abs(p ₇ −p ₃)+1)>>1

sq₃=Abs(q₀−q₃), derived as in HEVC

if (q side is greater than or equal to 32)

-   -   If(Sq==5)         sq ₃=(sq ₃+Abs(q ₅ −q ₃)+1)>>1         else         sq ₃=(sq ₃+Abs(q ₇ −q ₃)+1)>>1

As in HEVC, StrongFilterCondition=(dpq is less than (β>>2), sp₃+sq₃ is less than (3*β>>5), and Abs(p₀−q₀) is less than (5*t_(C)+1)>>1)? TRUE: FALSE.

2.4.4 Stronger Deblocking Filter for Luma (Designed for Larger Blocks)

Bilinear filter is used when samples at either one side of a boundary belong to a large block. A sample belonging to a large block is defined as when the width>=32 for a vertical edge, and when height>=32 for a horizontal edge.

The bilinear filter is listed below.

Block boundary samples p_(i) for i=0 to Sp−1 and q_(i) for j=0 to Sq−1 (pi and qi are the i-th sample within a row for filtering vertical edge, or the i-th sample within a column for filtering horizontal edge) in HEVC deblocking described above) are then replaced by linear interpolation as follows:

-   -   p_(i)′=(f_(i)*Middle_(s,t)+(64−f_(i))*P_(s)+32)>>6), clipped to         p_(i)±tcPD_(i)     -   q_(j)′=(g_(j)*Middle_(s,t)+(64−g_(j))*Q_(s)+32)>>6), clipped to         q_(j)±tcPD_(j)         where tcPD_(i) and tcPD_(j) term is a position dependent         clipping described in Section 2.4.7 and g_(j), f_(i),         Middle_(s,t), P_(s) and Q_(s) are given below:

2.4.5 Deblocking Control for Chroma

The chroma strong filters are used on both sides of the block boundary. Here, the chroma filter is selected when both sides of the chroma edge are greater than or equal to 8 (chroma position), and the following decision with three conditions are satisfied: the first one is for decision of boundary strength as well as large block. The proposed filter can be applied when the block width or height which orthogonally crosses the block edge is equal to or larger than 8 in chroma sample domain. The second and third one is basically the same as for HEVC luma deblocking decision, which are on/off decision and strong filter decision, respectively.

In the first decision, boundary strength (bS) is modified for chroma filtering and the conditions are checked sequentially. If a condition is satisfied, then the remaining conditions with lower priorities are skipped.

Chroma deblocking is performed when bS is equal to 2, or b S is equal to 1 when a large block boundary is detected.

The second and third condition is basically the same as HEVC luma strong filter decision as follows.

In the second condition:

-   -   d is then derived as in HEVC luma deblocking.

The second condition will be TRUE when d is less than.

In the third condition StrongFilterCondition is derived as follows:

-   -   dpq is derived as in HEVC.         sp ₃=Abs(p ₃ −p ₀), derived as in HEVC         sq ₃=Abs(q ₀ −q ₃), derived as in HEVC

As in HEVC design, StrongFilterCondition=(dpq is less than (β>>2), sp₃+sq₃ is less than (β>>3), and Abs(p₀−q₀) is less than (5*t_(C)+1)>>1)

2.4.6 Strong Deblocking Filter for Chroma

The following strong deblocking filter for chroma is defined: p ₂′=(3*p ₃+2*p ₂ +p ₁ +p ₀ +q ₀+4)>>3 p ₁′=(2*p ₃ +p ₂+2*p ₁ +p ₀ +q ₀ +q ₁+4)>>3 p ₀′=(p ₃ +p ₂ +p ₁+2*p ₀ +q ₀ +q ₁ +q ₂+4)>>3

The proposed chroma filter performs deblocking on a 4×4 chroma sample grid.

2.4.7 Position Dependent Clipping

The position dependent clipping tcPD is applied to the output samples of the luma filtering process involving strong and long filters that are modifying 7, 5 and 3 samples at the boundary. Assuming quantization error distribution, it is proposed to increase clipping value for samples which are expected to have higher quantization noise, thus expected to have higher deviation of the reconstructed sample value from the true sample value.

For each P or Q boundary filtered with asymmetrical filter, depending on the result of decision-making process in section 2.4.2, position dependent threshold table is selected from two tables (e.g., Tc7 and Tc3 tabulated below) that are provided to decoder as a side information: Tc7={6,5,4,3,2,1,1};Tc3={6,4,2}; tcPD=(Sp==3)?Tc3:Tc7; tcQD=(Sq==3)?Tc3:Tc7;

For the P or Q boundaries being filtered with a short symmetrical filter, position dependent threshold of lower magnitude is applied: Tc3={3,2,1};

Following defining the threshold, filtered p′_(i) and q′_(i) sample values are clipped according to tcP and tcQ clipping values: p″ _(i)=Clip3(p′ _(i) +t _(cPi) ,p′ _(i) −tcP _(i) ,p′ _(i)), q′ _(j)=Clip3(q′ _(j) +tcQ _(j) ,q′ _(j) −tcQ _(j) ,q′ _(j));

where p′_(i) and q′_(i) are filtered sample values, p″_(i) and q″_(j) are output sample value after the clipping and tcP_(i) tcP_(i) are clipping thresholds that are derived from the VVC tc parameter and tcPD and tcQD. The function Clip3 is a clipping function as it is specified in VVC.

2.4.8 Sub-Block Deblocking Adjustment

To enable parallel friendly deblocking using both long filters and sub-block deblocking the long filters is restricted to modify at most 5 samples on a side that uses sub-block deblocking (AFFINE or ATMVP or DVR) as shown in the luma control for long filters. Additionally, the sub-block deblocking is adjusted such that that sub-block boundaries on an 8×8 grid that are close to a CU or an implicit TU boundary is restricted to modify at most two samples on each side.

Following applies to sub-block boundaries that not are aligned with the CU boundary.

If (mode block Q==SUBBLOCKMODE && edge !=0) {

if (!(implicitTU && (edge==(64/4))))

-   -   if         (edge==2∥edge==(orthogonalLength−2)∥edge==(56/4)∥edge==(72/4))         -   Sp=Sq=2;     -   else         -   Sp=Sq=3;     -   else         -   Sp=Sq=bSideQisLargeBlk?5:3             }

Where edge equal to 0 corresponds to CU boundary, edge equal to 2 or equal to orthogonalLength−2 corresponds to sub-block boundary 8 samples from a CU boundary etc. Where implicit TU is true if implicit split of TU is used.

2.5 SAO

The input of SAO is the reconstructed samples after DB. The concept of SAO is to reduce mean sample distortion of a region by first classifying the region samples into multiple categories with a selected classifier, obtaining an offset for each category, and then adding the offset to each sample of the category, where the classifier index and the offsets of the region are coded in the bitstream. In HEVC and VVC, the region (the unit for SAO parameters signaling) is defined to be a CTU.

Two SAO types that can satisfy the requirements of low complexity are adopted in HEVC. Those two types are edge offset (EO) and band offset (BO), which are discussed in further detail below. An index of an SAO type is coded (which is in the range of [0, 2]). For EO, the sample classification is based on comparison between current samples and neighboring samples according to 1-D directional patterns: horizontal, vertical, 1350 diagonal, and 450 diagonal.

FIG. 8 shows four 1-D directional patterns for EO sample classification: horizontal (EO class=0), vertical (EO class=1), 135° diagonal (EO class=2), and 45° diagonal (EO class=3)

For a given EO class, each sample inside the CTB is classified into one of five categories. The current sample value, labeled as “c,” is compared with its two neighbors along the selected 1-D pattern. The classification rules for each sample are summarized in Table I. Categories 1 and 4 are associated with a local valley and a local peak along the selected 1-D pattern, respectively. Categories 2 and 3 are associated with concave and convex corners along the selected 1-D pattern, respectively. If the current sample does not belong to EO categories 1-4, then it is category 0 and SAO is not applied.

TABLE 3 Sample Classification Rules for Edge Offset Category Condition 1 c < a and c < b 2 ( c < a && c == b) ∥(c == a && c < b) 3 ( c > a && c == b) ∥(c == a && c > b) 4 c > a && c > b 5 None of above

2.6 Geometry Transformation-Based Adaptive Loop Filter

The input of DB is the reconstructed samples after DB and SAO. The sample classification and filtering process are based on the reconstructed samples after DB and SAO.

In some embodiments, a geometry transformation-based adaptive loop filter (GALF) with block-based filter adaption is applied. For the luma component, one among 25 filters is selected for each 2×2 block, based on the direction and activity of local gradients.

2.6.1 Filter Shape

In some embodiments, up to three diamond filter shapes (as shown in FIG. 9 ) can be selected for the luma component. An index is signalled at the picture level to indicate the filter shape used for the luma component. Each square represents a sample, and Ci (i being 0˜6 (left), 0˜12 (middle), 0˜20 (right)) denotes the coefficient to be applied to the sample. For chroma components in a picture, the 5×5 diamond shape is always used.

2.6.1.1 Block Classification

Each 2×2 block is categorized into one out of 25 classes. The classification index C is derived based on its directionality D and a quantized value of activity A, as follows: C=5D+Â.  (1)

To calculate D and Â, gradients of the horizontal, vertical and two diagonal direction are first calculated using 1-D Laplacian:

$\begin{matrix} {{g_{v} = {\underset{k = {i - 2}}{\sum\limits^{i + 3}}{\underset{l = {j - 2}}{\sum\limits^{j + 3}}V_{k,l}}}},{V_{k,l} = {❘{{2{R\left( {k,l} \right)}} - {R\left( {k,{l - 1}} \right)} - {R\left( {k,{l + 1}} \right)}}❘}},} & (2) \end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix} {{g_{h} = {\sum\limits_{k = {i - 2}}^{i + 3}{\sum\limits_{l = {j - 2}}^{j + 3}H_{k,l}}}},{H_{k,l} = {❘{{2{R\left( {k,l} \right)}} - {R\left( {{k - 1},l} \right)} - {R\left( {{k + 1},l} \right)}}❘}},} & (3) \end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix} {{g_{d1} = {\sum\limits_{k = {i - 2}}^{i + 3}{\sum\limits_{l = {j - 3}}^{j + 3}{D1_{k,l}}}}},{{D1_{k,l}} = {❘{{2{R\left( {k,l} \right)}} - {R\left( {{k - 1},{l - 1}} \right)} - {R\left( {{k + 1},{l + 1}} \right)}}❘}}} & (4) \end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix} {{g_{d2} = {\sum\limits_{k = {i - 2}}^{i + 3}{\sum\limits_{j = {j - 2}}^{j + 3}{D2_{k,l}}}}},{{D2_{k,l}} = {❘{{2{R\left( {k,l} \right)}} - {R\left( {{k - 1},{l + 1}} \right)} - {R\left( {{k + 1},{l - 1}} \right)}}❘}}} & (5) \end{matrix}$

Indices i and j refer to the coordinates of the upper left sample in the 2×2 block and R(i, j) indicates a reconstructed sample at coordinate (i, j).

Then D maximum and minimum values of the gradients of horizontal and vertical directions are set as: g _(h,v) ^(max)=max(g _(h) ,g _(v)), g _(h,v) ^(min)=min(g _(h) ,g _(v)),  (6)

and the maximum and minimum values of the gradient of two diagonal directions are set as: g _(d0,d1) ^(max)=max(g _(d0) ,g _(d1)), g _(d0,d1) ^(min)=min(g _(d0) ,g _(d1)),  (6)

To derive the value of the directionality D, these values are compared against each other and with two thresholds t₁ and t₂:

Step 1. If both g_(h,v) ^(max)≤t₁·g_(h,v) ^(min) and g_(d0,d1) ^(max)≤t₁·g_(d0,d1) ^(min) are true, D is set to 0.

Step 2. If g_(h,v) ^(max)/g_(h,v) ^(min)>g_(d0,d1) ^(max)/g_(d0,d1) ^(min), continue from Step 3; otherwise continue from Step 4.

Step 3. If g_(h,v) ^(max)>t₂·g_(h,v) ^(min), D is set to 2; otherwise D is set to 1.

Step 4. If g_(d0,d1) ^(max)>t₂·g_(d0,d1) ^(min), D is set to 4; otherwise D is set to 3.

The activity value A is calculated as:

$\begin{matrix} {A = {\underset{k = {i - 2}}{\sum\limits^{i + 3}}{\underset{l = {j - 2}}{\sum\limits^{j + 3}}{\left( {V_{k,l} + H_{k,l}} \right).}}}} & (8) \end{matrix}$

A is further quantized to the range of 0 to 4, inclusively, and the quantized value is denoted as Â.

For both chroma components in a picture, no classification method is applied, e.g a single set of ALF coefficients is applied for each chroma component.

2.6.1.2 Geometric Transformations of Filter Coefficients

FIG. 10 shows relative coordinator for the 5×5 diamond filter support: Left: Diagonal Center: Vertical flip, Right: Rotation.

Before filtering each 2×2 block, geometric transformations such as rotation or diagonal and vertical flipping are applied to the filter coefficients f(k, l), which is associated with the coordinate (k, l), depending on gradient values calculated for that block. This is equivalent to applying these transformations to the samples in the filter support region. The idea is to make different blocks to which ALF is applied more similar by aligning their directionality.

Three geometric transformations, including diagonal, vertical flip and rotation are introduced: Diagonal: f _(D)(k,l)f(l,k), Vertical flip: f _(V)(k,l)=f(k,K−l−1), Rotation: f _(R)(k,l)=f(K−l−1,k).  (9)

where K is the size of the filter and 0≤k, l≤K−1 are coefficients coordinates, such that location (0,0) is at the upper left corner and location (K−1, K−1) is at the lower right corner. The transformations are applied to the filter coefficients f(k, l) depending on gradient values calculated for that block. The relationship between the transformation and the four gradients of the four directions are summarized in Table 4. FIG. 9 shows the transformed coefficients for each position based on the 5×5 diamond.

TABLE 4 Mapping of the gradient calculated for one block and the transformations Gradient values Transformation g_(d2) < g_(d1) and g_(h) < g_(v) No transformation g_(d2) < g_(d1) and g_(v) < g_(h) Diagonal g_(d1) < g_(d2) and g_(h) < g_(v) Vertical flip g_(d1) < g_(d2) and g_(v) < g_(h) Rotation

2.6.1.3 Filter Parameters Signalling

In some embodiments, GALF filter parameters are signalled for the first CTU, e.g., after the slice header and before the SAO parameters of the first CTU. Up to 25 sets of luma filter coefficients could be signalled. To reduce bits overhead, filter coefficients of different classification can be merged. Also, the GALF coefficients of reference pictures are stored and allowed to be reused as GALF coefficients of a current picture. The current picture may choose to use GALF coefficients stored for the reference pictures and bypass the GALF coefficients signalling. In this case, only an index to one of the reference pictures is signalled, and the stored GALF coefficients of the indicated reference picture are inherited for the current picture.

To support GALF temporal prediction, a candidate list of GALF filter sets is maintained. At the beginning of decoding a new sequence, the candidate list is empty. After decoding one picture, the corresponding set of filters may be added to the candidate list. Once the size of the candidate list reaches the maximum allowed value (e.g., 6), a new set of filters overwrites the oldest set in decoding order, and that is, first-in-first-out (FIFO) rule is applied to update the candidate list. To avoid duplications, a set could only be added to the list when the corresponding picture doesn't use GALF temporal prediction. To support temporal scalability, there are multiple candidate lists of filter sets, and each candidate list is associated with a temporal layer. More specifically, each array assigned by temporal layer index (TempIdx) may compose filter sets of previously decoded pictures with equal to lower TempIdx. For example, the k-th array is assigned to be associated with TempIdx equal to k, and it only contains filter sets from pictures with TempIdx smaller than or equal to k. After coding a certain picture, the filter sets associated with the picture will be used to update those arrays associated with equal or higher TempIdx.

Temporal prediction of GALF coefficients is used for inter coded frames to minimize signalling overhead. For intra frames, temporal prediction is not available, and a set of 16 fixed filters is assigned to each class. To indicate the usage of the fixed filter, a flag for each class is signalled and if required, the index of the chosen fixed filter. Even when the fixed filter is selected for a given class, the coefficients of the adaptive filter f(k, l) can still be sent for this class in which case the coefficients of the filter which will be applied to the reconstructed image are sum of both sets of coefficients.

The filtering process of luma component can controlled at CU level. A flag is signalled to indicate whether GALF is applied to the luma component of a CU. For chroma component, whether GALF is applied or not is indicated at picture level only.

2.6.1.4 Filtering Process

At decoder side, when GALF is enabled for a block, each sample R(i,j) within the block is filtered, resulting in sample value R′(i,j) as shown below, where L denotes filter length, f_(m,n) represents filter coefficient, and f(k, l) denotes the decoded filter coefficients.

$\begin{matrix} {{R^{\prime}\left( {i,j} \right)} = {\sum\limits_{k = {{- L}/2}}^{L/2}{\sum\limits_{l = {{- L}/2}}^{L/2}{{f\left( {k,l} \right)} \times {R\left( {{i + k},{j + l}} \right)}}}}} & (10) \end{matrix}$

FIG. 11 shows an example of relative coordinates used for 5×5 diamond filter support supposing the current sample's coordinate (i, j) to be (0, 0). Samples in different coordinates filled with the same color are multiplied with the same filter coefficients.

2.7 Geometry Transformation-Based Adaptive Loop Filter (GALF)

2.7.1 Example GALF

In some embodiments, the filtering process of the Adaptive Loop Filter, is performed as follows: O(x,y)=Σ_((i,j)) w(i,j)·I(x+i,y+j),  (11)

where samples I(x+i,y+j) are input samples, O(x,y) is the filtered output sample (e.g. filter result), and w(i,j) denotes the filter coefficients. In practice, in VTM4.0 it is implemented using integer arithmetic for fixed point precision computations:

$\begin{matrix} {{{O\left( {x,y} \right)} = {\left( {{\sum\limits_{i = {- \frac{L}{2}}}^{\frac{L}{2}}{\sum\limits_{j = {- \frac{L}{2}}}^{\frac{L}{2}}{{w\left( {i,j} \right)} \cdot {I\left( {{x + i},{y + j}} \right)}}}} + 64} \right) \gg 7}},} & (12) \end{matrix}$

where L denotes the filter length, and where w(i, j) are the filter coefficients in fixed point precision.

The current design of GALF in VVC has the following major changes:

(1) The adaptive filter shape is removed. Only 7×7 filter shape is allowed for luma component and 5×5 filter shape is allowed for chroma component.

(2) Signaling of ALF parameters in removed from slice/picture level to CTU level.

(3) Calculation of class index is performed in 4×4 level instead of 2×2. In addition, in some embodiments, sub-sampled Laplacian calculation method for ALF classification is utilized. More specifically, there is no need to calculate the horizontal/vertical/45 diagonal/135 degree gradients for each sample within one block. Instead, 1:2 subsampling is utilized.

FIG. 12A-12D show Subsampled Laplacian calculation for CE2.6.2. FIG. 12 A illustrates subsampled positions for vertical gradient, FIG. 12 illustrates subsampled positions for horizontal gradient, FIG. 12C illustrates sub sampled positions for diagonal gradient, and FIG. 12D illustrates subsampled positions for diagonal gradient.

2.8 Non-Linear ALF

2.8.1 Filtering Reformulation

Equation (11) can be reformulated, without coding efficiency impact, in the following expression: O(x,y)=I(x,y)+Σ_((i,j)≠(0,0)) w(i,j)·(I(x+i,y+j)−I(x,y)),  (13) where w(i, j) are the same filter coefficients as in equation (11) [excepted w(0, 0) which is equal to 1 in equation (13) while it is equal to 1−Σ_((i,j)≠(0,0))w(i,j) in equation (11)].

Using this above filter formula of (13), VVC introduces the non-linearity to make ALF more efficient by using a simple clipping function to reduce the impact of neighbor sample values (I(x+i, y+j)) when they are too different with the current sample value (I(x, y)) being filtered.

More specifically, the ALF filter is modified as follows: O′(x,y)=I(x,y)+Σ_((i,j)≠(0,0)) w(i,j)·K(I(x+i,y+j)−I(x,y),k(i,j)),  (14)

where K(d, b)=min (b, max(−b, d)) is the clipping function, and k(i, j) are clipping parameters, which depends on the (i,j) filter coefficient. The encoder performs the optimization to find the best k(i,j).

In some embodiments, the clipping parameters k(i, j) are specified for each ALF filter, one clipping value is signaled per filter coefficient. It means that up to 12 clipping values can be signalled in the bitstream per Luma filter and up to 6 clipping values for the Chroma filter.

In order to limit the signaling cost and the encoder complexity, only 4 fixed values which are the same for INTER and INTRA slices are used.

BecausethevarianceofthelocaldifferencesisoftenhigherforLumathanforChroma, two different sets for the Luma and Chroma filters are applied. The maximum sample value (here 1024 for 10 bits bit-depth) in each set is also introduced, so that clipping can be disabled if it is not necessary.

The sets of clipping values used in some embodiments are provided in the Table 5. The 4 values have been selected by roughly equally splitting, in the logarithmic domain, the full range of the sample values (coded on 10 bits) for Luma, and the range from 4 to 1024 for Chroma.

More precisely, the Luma table of clipping values have been obtained by the following formula:

$\begin{matrix} {{\left. \left. {{AlfClip}_{L} = \left\{ {{{{round}\left( \left( (M)^{\frac{1}{N}} \right)^{N - n + 1} \right)}{for}n} \in {1¨N}} \right.} \right\rbrack \right\}{with}M} = {{2^{10}{and}N} = 4.}} & (15) \end{matrix}$

Similarly, the Chroma tables of clipping values is obtained according to the following formula:

$\begin{matrix} {\left. \left. {{AlfClip}_{C} = \left\{ {{{{{{round}\left( {A.\left( \left( \frac{M}{A} \right)^{\frac{1}{N - 1}} \right)^{N - n}} \right)}{for}n} \in 1}..}N} \right.} \right\rbrack \right\},{{{with}M} = 2^{10}},{N = {{4{and}A} = {4.}}}} & (16) \end{matrix}$

TABLE 5 Authorized clipping values INTRA/INTER tile group LUMA { 1024, 181, 32, 6 } CHROMA { 1024, 161, 25, 4 }

The selected clipping values are coded in the “alf_data” syntax element by using a Golomb encoding scheme corresponding to the index of the clipping value in the above Table 5. This encoding scheme is the same as the encoding scheme for the filter index.

2.9 Virtual Boundary

In hardware and embedded software, picture-based processing is practically unacceptable due to its high picture buffer requirement. Using on-chip picture buffers is very expensive and using off-chip picture buffers significantly increases external memory access, power consumption, and data access latency. Therefore, DF, SAO, and ALF will be changed from picture-based to LCU-based decoding in real products. When LCU-based processing is used for DF, SAO, and ALF, the entire decoding process can be done LCU by LCU in a raster scan with an LCU-pipelining fashion for parallel processing of multiple LCUs. In this case, line buffers are required for DF, SAO, and ALF because processing one LCU row requires pixels from the above LCU row. If off-chip line buffers (e.g. DRAM) are used, the external memory bandwidth and power consumption will be increased; if on-chip line buffers (e.g. SRAM) are used, the chip area will be increased. Therefore, although line buffers are already much smaller than picture buffers, it is still desirable to reduce line buffers.

In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 13 , the total number of line buffers required is 11.25 lines for the Luma component. The explanation of the line buffer requirement is as follows: The deblocking of horizontal edge overlapping with CTU edge cannot be performed as the decisions and filtering require lines K, L, M, M from the first CTU and Lines O, P from the bottom CTU. Therefore, the deblocking of the horizontal edges overlapping with the CTU boundary is postponed until the lower CTU comes. Therefore for the lines K, L, M, N reconstructed luma samples have to be stored in the line buffer (4 lines). Then the SAO filtering can be performed for lines A till J. The line J can be SAO filtered as deblocking does not change the samples in line K. For SAO filtering of line K, the edge offset classification decision is only stored in the line buffer (which is 0.25 Luma lines). The ALF filtering can only be performed for lines A-F. As shown in FIG. 13 , the ALF classification is performed for each 4×4 block. Each 4×4 block classification needs an activity window of size 8×8 which in turn needs a 9×9 window to compute the id Laplacian to determine the gradient.

Therefore, for the block classification of the 4×4 block overlapping with lines G, H, I, J needs, SAO filtered samples below the Virtual boundary. In addition, the SAO filtered samples of lines D, E, F are required for ALF classification. Moreover, the ALF filtering of Line G needs three SAO filtered lines D, E, F from above lines. Therefore, the total line buffer requirement is as follows:

-   -   Lines K-N(Horizontal DF pixels): 4 lines     -   Lines D-J (SAO filtered pixels): 7 lines     -   SAO Edge offset classifier values between line J and line K:         0.25 line

Therefore, the total number of luma lines required is 7+4+0.25=11.25.

Similarly, the line buffer requirement of the Chroma component is illustrated in FIG. 14 . The line buffer requirement for Chroma component is evaluated to be 6.25 lines.

In order to eliminate the line buffer requirements of SAO and ALF, the concept of virtual boundary (VB) is introduced in the latest VVC. As shown in FIG. 13 , VBs are upward shifted horizontal LCU boundaries by N pixels. For each LCU, SAO and ALF can process pixels above the VB before the lower LCU comes but cannot process pixels below the VB until the lower LCU comes, which is caused by DF. With consideration of the hardware implementation cost, the space between the proposed VB and the horizontal LCU boundary is set as four pixels for luma (e.g. N=4 in FIG. 13 ) and two pixels for chroma (e.g. N=2 in FIG. 9 ).

2.9.1 Modified ALF Block Classification when VB Size N is 4

FIGS. 15A-15B depict modified block classification for the case when the virtual boundary is 4 lines above the CTU boundary (N=4). As depicted in FIG. 15A, for the 4×4 block starting at line G, the block classification only uses the lines E till J. However Laplacian gradient calculation for the samples belonging to line J requires one more line below (line K). Therefore, line K is padded with line J.

Similarly, as depicted in FIG. 15B, for the 4×4 block starting at line K, the block classification only uses the lines K till P. However Laplacian gradient calculation for the samples belonging to line K require one more line above (line J). Therefore, line J is padded with line K.

2.9.2 Two-Side Padding for Samples Cross Virtual Boundaries

As depicted in FIGS. 16A-16C, truncated version of the filters is used for filtering of the luma samples belonging to the lines close to the virtual boundaries. Taking FIG. 16A for example, when filtering the line M as denoted in FIG. 13 , e.g., the center sample of the 7×7 diamond support is in the line M. it requires to access one line above the VB (denoted by bold line). In this case, the samples above the VB is copied from the right below sample below the VB, such as the P0 sample in the solid line is copied to the above dash position. Symmetrically, P3 sample in the solid line is also copied to the right below dashed position even the sample for that position is available. The copied samples are only used in the luma filtering process.

The padding method used for ALF virtual boundaries may be denoted as ‘Two-side Padding’ wherein if one sample located at (i,j) (e.g., the P0A with dash line in FIG. 16B) is padded, then the corresponding sample located at (m, n) (e.g., the P3B with dash line in FIG. 16B) which share the same filter coefficient is also padded even the sample is available, as depicted in FIGS. 16A-16C and FIGS. 17A-17B. In FIGS. 16A-16C, 7×7 diamond filter support, center is the current sample to be filtered. FIG. 16A shows one required line above/below VB need to be padded. FIG. 16B shows 2 required lines above/below VB need to be padded. FIG. 16C shows 3 required lines above/below VB need to be padded.

Similarly, as depicted in FIGS. 17A-17B, the two-side padding method is also used for chroma ALF filtering. FIGS. 17A-17B show modified chroma ALF filtering at virtual boundary (5×5 diamond filter support, center is the current sample to be filtered). FIG. 17A shows 1 required lines above/below VB need to be padded. FIG. 17B shows 2 required lines above/below VB need to be padded.

2.9.3 Alternative Way for Implementation of the Two-Side Padding when Non-Linear ALF is Disabled

When the non-linear ALF is disabled for a CTB, e.g., the clipping parameters k(i,j) in equation (14) are equal to (1<<Bitdepth), the padding process could be replaced by modifying the filter coefficients (a.k.a modified-coeff based ALF, MALF). For example, when filtering samples in line L/I, the filter coefficient c5 is modified to c5′, in this case, there is no need to copy the luma samples from the solid P0A to dashed P0A and solid P3B to dashed P3B FIG. 18A. In this case, the two-side padding and MALF will generate the same results, assuming the current sample to be filtered is located at (x, y). c5·K(I(x−1,y−1)−I(x,y),k(−1,−1))+c1·K(I(x−1,y−2)−I(x,y),k(−1,−2))=(c5+c1)·K(I(x−1,y−1)−I(x,y),k(−1,−1))  (17) since K(d, b)=d and I(x−1,y−1)=I(x−1,y−2) due to padding.

However, when the non-linear ALF is enabled, MALF and two-side padding may generate different filtered results, since the non-linear parameters are associated with each coefficient, such as for filter coefficients c5 and c1, the clipping parameters are different. Therefore, c5·K(I(x−1,y−1)−I(x,y),k(−1,−1))+c1·K(I(x−1,y−2)−I(x,y),k(−1,−2))!=(c5+c1)·K(I(x−1,y−1)−I(x,y),k(−1,−1))  (18)

since K(d, b) !=d, even I(x−1, y−1)=I(x−1,y−2) due to padding.

2.10 Specification on ALF Filtering

Newly added parts are indicated in bold italicized underlined text. The deleted parts are indicated using [[ ]]. 7.3.2.4 Picture parameter set RBSP syntax

Descriptor pic_parameter_set_rbsp( ) {  pps_pic_parameter_set_id ue(v)  pps_seq_parameter_set_id ue(v)  output_flag_present_flag u(1)  single_tile_in_pic_flag u(1)  if( !single_tile_in_pic_flag ) {   uniform_tile_spacing_flag u(1)   if( uniform_tile_spacing_flag ) {    tile_cols_width_minus1 ue(v)    tile_rows_height_minus1 ue(v)   } else {    num_tile_columns_minus1 ue(v)    num_tile_rows_minus1 ue(v)    for( i = 0; i < num_tile_columns_minus1; i++ )     tile_column_width_minus1[ i ] ue(v)    for( i = 0; i < num_tile_rows_minus1; i++ )     tile_row_height_minus1[ i ] ue(v)   }   brick_splitting_present_flag u(1)   for( i = 0; brick_splitting_present_flag && i < NumTilesInPic; i++ ) {    brick_split_flag[ i ] u(1)    if( brick_split_flag[ i ] ) {     uniform_brick_spacing_flag[ i ] u(1)     if( uniform_brick_spacing_flag[ i ] )      brick_height_minus1[ i ] ue(v)     else {      num_brick_rows_minus1[ i ] ue(v)      for( j = 0; j < num_brick_rows_minus1[ i ]; j++ )       brick_row_height_minus1[ i ][ j ] ue(v)     }    }   }   single_brick_per_slice_flag u(1)   if( !single_brick_per_slice_flag )    rect_slice_flag u(1)   if( rect_slice_flag && !single_brick_per_slice_flag ) {    num_slices_in_pic_minus1 ue(v)    for( i = 0; i <= num_slices_in_pic_minus1; i++ ) (     if( i > 0 )      top_left_brick_idx[ i ] u(v)     bottom_right_brick_idx_delta[ i ] u(v)    }   } {{   loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag}} {{u(1)}} {{   if( loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag )}} {{    loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag}} {{u(1)}} {{ }}}  if( rect_slice_flag) {   signalled_slice_id_flag u(1)   if( signalled_slice_id_flag ) {    signalled_slice_id_length_minus1 ue(v)    for( i = 0; i <= num_slices_in_pic_minus1; i++ )     slice_id[ i ] u(v)   }  }  entropy_coding_sync_enabled_flag u(1)  cabac_init_present_flag u(1)  for( i = 0; i < 2; i++ )   num_ref_idx_default_active_minus1[ i ] ue(v)  rpl1_idx_present_flag u(1)  init_qp_minus26 se(v)  transform_skip_enabled_flag u(1)  if( transform_skip_enabled_flag )   log2_transform_skip_max_size_minus2 ue(v)  cu_qp_delta_enabled_flag u(1)  if( cu_qp_delta_enabled_flag )   cu_qp_delta_subdiv ue(v)  pps_cb_qp_offset se(v)  pps_cr_qp_offset se(v)  pps_joint_cbcr_qp_offset se(v)  pps_slice_chroma_qp_offsets_present_flag u(1)  weighted_pred_flag u(1)  weighted_bipred_flag u(1)  deblocking_filter_control_present_flag u(1)  if( deblocking_filter_control_present_flag ) {   deblocking_filter_override_enabled_flag u(1)   pps_deblocking_filter_disabled_flag u(1)   if( !pps_deblocking_filter_disabled_flag ) {    pps_beta_offset_div2 se(v)    pps_tc_offset_div2 se(v)   }  }  pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag u(1)  if( pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag ) {   pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries u(2)   for( i = 0; i < pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries; i++ )    pps_virtual_boundaries_pos_x[ i ] u(v)   pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries u(2)   for( i = 0; i < pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries; i++ )    pps_virtual_boundaries_pos_y[ i ] u(v)  }  pps_extension_flag u(1)  if( pps_extension_flag )   while( more_rbsp_data( ) )    pps_extension_data_flag u(1)  rbsp_trailing_bits( ) } loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag equal to 1 specifies that in-loop filtering operations may be performed across brick boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag equal to 0 specifics that in-loop filtering operations are not performed across brick boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. The in-loop filtering operations include the deblocking filter, sample adaptive offset filter, and adaptive loop filter operations. When not present, the value of loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is inferred to be equal to 1. loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag equal to 1 specifies that in-loop filtering operations may be performed across slice boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. loop_filter_across_slice_enabled_flag equal to 0 specifies that in-loop filtering operations are not performed across slice boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. The in-loop filtering operations include the deblocking filter, sample adaptive offset filter, and adaptive loop filter operations. When not present, the value of loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is inferred to be equal to 0. pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag equal to 1 specifies that the in-loop filtering operations are disabled across the virtual boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag equal to 0 specifies that no such disabling of in-loop filtering operations is applied in pictures referring to the PPS. The in-loop filtering operations include the deblocking filter, sample adaptive offset filter, and adaptive loop filter operations. When not present, the value of pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is inferred to be equal to 0. pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries specifies the number of pps_virtual_boundaries_pos_x[i] syntax elements that are present in the PPS. When pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries is not present, it is inferred to be equal to 0. 8.8.5.2 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Luma Samples Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed luma picture sample array         alfPicture_(L),     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         luma picture sample array alfPicture_(L).         The derivation process for filter index clause 8.8.5.3 is         invoked with the location (xCtb,yCtb) and the reconstructed luma         picture sample array recPicture_(L) as inputs, and filtIdx[x][y]         and transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 as outputs.         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed luma samples         alfPicture_(L) [x][y], each reconstructed luma sample inside the         current luma coding tree block recPicture_(L)[x][y] is filtered         as follows with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1:     -   The array of luma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of luma         clipping values c[j] corresponding to the filter specified by         filtIdx[x][y] is derived as follows with j=0 . . . 11:         -   If AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]             is less than 16, the following applies:             i=AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]  (8-1172)             f[j]=AlfFixFiltCoeff[AlfClassToFiltMap[i][filtidx]][j]  (8-1173)             c[j]=2^(BitdepthY)  (8-1174)         -   Otherwise             (AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize] is             greater than or equal to 16, the following applies:             i=slice_alf_aps_id_luma[AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]−16]               (8-1175)             f[j]=AlfCoeff_(L)[i][filtIdx[x][y]][j]  (8-1176)             c[j]=AlfClip_(L)[i][filtIdx[x][y]][j]  (8-1177)     -   The luma filter coefficients and clipping values index idx are         derived depending on transposeIdx[x][y] as follows:         -   If transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 1, the following             applies:             idx[ ]={9,4,10,8,1,5,11,7,3,0,2,6}(8-1178)         -   Otherwise, if transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 2, the             following applies:             idx[ ]={0,3,2,1,8,7,6,5,4,9,10,11}  (8-1179)         -   Otherwise, if transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 3, the             following applies:             idx[ ]={9,8,10,4,3,7,11,5,1,0,2,6}  (8-1180)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             idx[ ]={0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11}  (8-1181)     -   The locations (h_(x+i),v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−3 . . . 3 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1182)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater             than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1183)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1184)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1185)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater             than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1186)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1187)     -   The variable applyVirtualBoundary is derived as follows:         -   If one or more of the following conditions are true,             applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 0:             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the picture.             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the brick and                 loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the slice and                 loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 one of the bottom virtual boundaries of the picture and                 pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag                 is equal to 1.         -   Otherwise, applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 1.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1, r2 and r3 are specified in         Table 8-22 according to the horizontal luma sample position y         and applyVirtualBoundary.     -   The variable curr is derived as follows:         curr=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v _(y)]  (8-1188)     -   The variable sum is derived as follows:         sum=f[idx[0]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[0]],c[idx[0]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x)         ,v _(y+r3)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[0]],c[idx[0]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x) ,v         _(y−r3)]−curr))+f[idx[1]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[1]],c[idx[1]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−1) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[1]],c[idx[1]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−1) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[2]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[2]],c[idx[2]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[2]],c[idx[2]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x)         ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[3]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[3]],c[idx[3]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−1) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[3]],c[idx[3]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−1) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[4]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[4]],c[idx[4]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+2) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[4]],c[idx[4]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−2) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[5]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[5]],c[idx[5]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[5]],c[idx[5]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[6]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[6]],c[idx[6]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[6]],c[idx[6]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x)         ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[7]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[7]],c[idx[7]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[7]],c[idx[7]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[8]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[8]],c[idx[8]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−2) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[8]],c[idx[8]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+2) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[9]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[9]],c[idx[9]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+3) ,v         _(y)]−−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[9]],c[idx[9]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x−3)         ,v         _(y)]−−curr))+f[idx[10]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[10]],c[idx[10]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+2) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[10]]c[idx[10]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x−2)         ,v         _(y)]−curr))+f[idx[11]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[11]],c[idx[11]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+1) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[11]]c[idx[11]]recPicture_(L)[h _(x−1)         ,v _(y)]−curr))  (8-1189)         sum=curr+((sum+64)>>7)  (8-1190)     -   The modified filtered reconstructed luma picture sample         alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+X][yCtb+y] is derived as follows:         -   If pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag and             pcm_flag[xCtb+x][yCtb+y] are both equal to 1, the following             applies:             alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+x][yCtb+y]=recPictue_(L)[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]  (8-1191)         -   Otherwise (pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag is equal to 0 or             pcm_flag[x][y] is equal 0), the following applies:             alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+x][yCtb+y]=Clip3(0,(1<<BitDepth_(Y))−1,sum)  (8-1192)

TABLE 8-22 Specification of r1, r2, and r3 according to the horizontal luma sample position y and applyVirtualBoundary condition r1 r2 r3 ( y = = CtbSizeY − 5 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 4 ) 0 0 0 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = CtbSizeY − 6 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 3 ) 1 1 1 && (applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = CtbSizeY − 7 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 2 ) 1 2 2 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) otherwise 1 2 3 8.8.5.4 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Chroma Samples Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a reconstructed chroma picture sample array recPicture prior to         the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample array alfPicture,     -   a chroma location (xCtbC, yCtbC) specifying the top-left sample         of the current chroma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         chroma picture sample array alfPicture.         The width and height of the current chroma coding tree block         ctbWidthC and ctbHeightC is derived as follows:         ctbWidthC=CtbSizeY/SubWidthC  (8-1230)         ctbHeightC=CtbSizeY/SubHeightC  (8-1231)         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed chroma samples         alfPicture[x][y], each reconstructed chroma sample inside the         current chroma coding tree block recPicture[x][y] is filtered as         follows with x=0 . . . ctbWidthC−1,y=0 . . . ctbHeightC−1:     -   The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         chroma samples (x, y) inside the given array recPictue of chroma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 2 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and             xCtbC+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1232)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−xCtbC−x             is greater than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1233)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1234)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and             yCtbC+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1235)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and             PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−yCtbC−y is greater             than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1236)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1237)     -   The variable applyVirtualBoundary is derived as follows:         -   If one or more of the following conditions are true,             applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 0:             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the picture.             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the brick and                 loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the slice and                 loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 one of the bottom virtual boundaries of the picture and                 pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag                 is equal to 1.         -   Otherwise, applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 1.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1 and r2 are specified in         Table 8-22 according to the horizontal luma sample position y         and applyVirtualBoundary.     -   The variable curr is derived as follows:         curr=recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]  (8-1238)     -   The array of chroma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of         chroma clipping values c[j] is derived as follows with j=0.5:         f[j]=AlfCoeff_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]   (8-1239)         c[j]=AlfClip_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]   (8-1240)     -   The variable sum is derived as follows:         sum=f[0]*(Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[1]*(Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[2]*(Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[3]*(Clip3(−c[3]c[3]recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[3],c[3],recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[4]*(Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x+2) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x−2) ,v         _(y)]−curr))+f[5]*(Clip3(−c[5],c[5],recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v         _(y)]−curr))+Clip3(−c[5],c[5],recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v         _(y)]−curr))  (8-1241)         sum=curr+(sum+64)>>7)  (8-1242)     -   The modified filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample         alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y] is derived as follows:         -   If pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag and             pcm_flag[(xCtbC+x)*SubWidthC][(yCtbC+y)*SubHeightC] are both             equal to 1, the following applies:             alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]  (8-1243)         -   Otherwise (pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag is equal to 0 or             pcm_flag[x][y] is equal 0), the following applies:             alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=Clip3(0,(1<<BitDepth_(C))−1,sum)  (8-1244)

2.11 Examples of CTU Processing

According to the current VVC design, if the bottom boundary of one CTB is a bottom boundary of a slice/brick, the ALF virtual boundary handling method is disabled. For example, one picture is split to multiple CTUs and 2 slices as depicted FIG. 19 .

Suppose the CTU size is M×M (e.g., M=64), according to the virtual boundary definition, the last 4 lines within a CTB are treated below a virtual boundary. In hardware implementation, the following apply:

-   -   If the bottom boundary of the CTB is the bottom boundary of a         picture (e.g., CTU-D), it processes the (M+4)×M block including         4 lines from above CTU row and all lines in current CTU.     -   Otherwise, if the bottom boundary of the CTB is the bottom         boundary of a slice (or brick) (e.g., CTU-C) and         loop_filter_across_slice_enabled_flag (or         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag) is equal to 0, it         processes the (M+4)×M block including 4 lines from above CTU row         and all lines in current CTU.     -   Otherwise, if a CTU/CTB in the first CTU row in a         slice/brick/tile (e.g., CTU-A), it processes the M×(M−4) block         excluding the last 4 lines.     -   Otherwise, if a CTU/CTB in not in the first CTU row of a         slice/brick/tile (e.g., CTU-B) and not in the last CTU row of a         of a slice/brick/tile, it processes the M×M block including 4         lines from above CTU row and excluding the last 4 lines in         current CTU.

FIG. 19 shows an example of processing of CTUs in a picture.

2.12 360-Degree Video Coding

The horizontal wrap around motion compensation in the VTM5 is a 360-specific coding tool designed to improve the visual quality of reconstructed 360-degree video in the equi-rectangular (ERP) projection format. In conventional motion compensation, when a motion vector refers to samples beyond the picture boundaries of the reference picture, repetitive padding is applied to derive the values of the out-of-bounds samples by copying from those nearest neighbors on the corresponding picture boundary. For 360-degree video, this method of repetitive padding is not suitable, and could cause visual artefacts called “seam artefacts” in a reconstructed viewport video. Because a 360-degree video is captured on a sphere and inherently has no “boundary,” the reference samples that are out of the boundaries of a reference picture in the projected domain can always be obtained from neighboring samples in the spherical domain. For a general projection format, it may be difficult to derive the corresponding neighboring samples in the spherical domain, because it involves 2D-to-3D and 3D-to-2D coordinate conversion, as well as sample interpolation for fractional sample positions. This problem is much simpler for the left and right boundaries of the ERP projection format, as the spherical neighbors outside of the left picture boundary can be obtained from samples inside the right picture boundary, and vice versa.

FIG. 20 shows an example of horizontal wrap around motion compensation in VVC.

The horizontal wrap around motion compensation process is as depicted in FIG. 20 . When a part of the reference block is outside of the reference picture's left (or right) boundary in the projected domain, instead of repetitive padding, the “out-of-boundary” part is taken from the corresponding spherical neighbors that are of the reference picture toward the right (or left) boundary in the projected domain. Repetitive padding is only used for the top and bottom picture boundaries. As depicted in FIG. 20 , the horizontal wrap around motion compensation can be combined with the non-normative padding method often used in 360-degree video coding In VVC, this is achieved by signaling a high-level syntax element to indicate the wrap-around offset, which should be set to the ERP picture width before padding; this syntax is used to adjust the position of horizontal wrap around accordingly. This syntax is not affected by the specific amount of padding on the left and right picture boundaries, and therefore naturally supports asymmetric padding of the ERP picture, e.g., when left and right padding are different. The horizontal wrap around motion compensation provides more meaningful information for motion compensation when the reference samples are outside of the reference picture's left and right boundaries.

For projection formats composed of a plurality of faces, no matter what kind of compact frame packing arrangement is used, discontinuities appear between two or more adjacent faces in the frame packed picture. For example, considering the 3×2 frame packing configuration depicted in FIG. 24 , the three faces in the top half are continuous in the 3D geometry, the three faces in the bottom half are continuous in the 3D geometry, but the top and bottom halves of the frame packed picture are discontinuous in the 3D geometry. If in-loop filtering operations are performed across this discontinuity, face seam artifacts may become visible in the reconstructed video.

To alleviate face seam artifacts, in-loop filtering operations may be disabled across discontinuities in the frame-packed picture. A syntax was proposed to signal vertical and/or horizontal virtual boundaries across which the in-loop filtering operations are disabled. Compared to using two tiles, one for each set of continuous faces, and to disable in-loop filtering operations across tiles, the proposed signaling method is more flexible as it does not require the face size to be a multiple of the CTU size.

2.13 Example Sub-Picture Based Motion-Constrained Independent Regions

In some embodiments, the following features are included:

1) Pictures may be divided into sub-pictures.

2) The indication of existence of sub-pictures is indicated in the SPS, along with other sequence-level information of sub-pictures.

3) Whether a sub-picture is treated as a picture in the decoding process (excluding in-loop filtering operations) can be controlled by the bitstream.

4) Whether in-loop filtering across sub-picture boundaries is disabled can be controlled by the bitstream for each sub-picture. The DBF, SAO, and ALF processes are updated for controlling of in-loop filtering operations across sub-picture boundaries.

5) For simplicity, as a starting point, the sub-picture width, height, horizontal offset, and vertical offset are signalled in units of luma samples in SPS. Sub-picture boundaries are constrained to be slice boundaries.

6) Treating a sub-picture as a picture in the decoding process (excluding in-loop filtering operations) is specified by slightly updating the coding_tree_unit( ) syntax, and updates to the following decoding processes:

-   -   The derivation process for (advanced) temporal luma motion         vector prediction     -   The luma sample bilinear interpolation process     -   The luma sample 8-tap interpolation filtering process     -   The chroma sample interpolation process

7) Sub-picture IDs are explicitly specified in the SPS and included in the tile group headers to enable extraction of sub-picture sequences without the need of changing VCL NAL units.

Output sub-picture sets (OSPS) are proposed to specify normative extraction and conformance points for sub-pictures and sets thereof.

3. TECHNICAL PROBLEMS SOLVED BY THE SOLUTIONS PROVIDED IN THE PRESENT DOCUMENT

The current VVC design has the following problems:

1. The current setting of enabling ALF virtual boundary is dependent on whether the bottom boundary of a CTB is a bottom boundary of a picture. If it is true, then ALF virtual boundary is disabled, such as CTU-D in FIG. 19 . However, it is possible that a bottom boundary of a CTB is outside a bottom boundary of a picture, such as 256×240 picture is split to 4 128×128 CTUs, in this case, the ALF virtual boundary would be wrongly set to true for the last 2 CTUs which has samples outside of the bottom picture boundary.

2. The way for handling ALF virtual boundary is disabled for bottom picture boundary and slice/tile/brick boundary. Disabling VB along slice/brick boundary may create pipeline bubble or require processing 68 lines per Virtual pipeline data units (VPDU, 64×64 in VVC) assuming the LCU size to be 64×64. For example:

a. For decoders not knowing the slice/brick/tile boundaries upfront (w.e. low-delay applications), the ALF line buffers need to be restored. Whether the content in the line buffers get used or not for the ALF filtering depends on whether the current CTU is also a slice/brick/tile boundary CTU, this information, however, is unknown until the next slice/brick/tile is decoded.

b. For decoders knowing the slice/brick/tile boundaries upfront, either the decoders need to live with pipeline bubbles (very unlikely) or run the ALF at a speed of 68 lines per 64×64 VDPU all the time (overprovision), to avoid using the ALF line buffers.

3. Different ways for handling virtual boundary and video unit boundary, e.g., different padding methods are existing. Meanwhile, more than one padding methods may be performed for a line when it is at multiple boundaries.

a. In one example, if the bottom boundary of a block is a 360 degree virtual boundary and ALF virtual boundary is also applied to this block, in this case, the padding method for 360 degree virtual boundary may be firstly applied to generate virtual samples below the 360 degree virtual boundary. Afterwards, these virtual samples located below the 360 degree virtual boundary are treated as being available. And the ALF 2-side padding method may be further applied according to FIG. 16 A-C. An example is depicted in FIG. 25 .

4. The way for handling virtual boundary may be sub-optimal, since padded samples are utilized which may be less efficient.

5. When the non-linear ALF is disabled, the MALF and two-side padding methods would be able to generate the same results for filtering a sample which requires to access samples crossing virtual boundary. However, when the the non-linear ALF is enabled, the two methods would bring different results. It would be beneficial to align the two cases.

6. A slice could be a rectangular one, or a non-rectangular one, such as depicted in FIG. 28 . In this case, for a CTU, it may not coincide with any boundaries (e.g., picture/slice/tile/brick). However, it may need to access samples outside the current slice. If filtering crossing the slice boundary (e.g., loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is false) is disabled, how to perform the ALF classification and filtering process is unknown.

7. A subpicture is a rectangular region of one or more slices within a picture. A subpicture contains one or more slices that collectively cover a rectangular region of a picture. The syntax table is modified as follows to include the concept of subpictures (bold, italicized, and underlined). 7.3.2.3 Sequence parameter set RBSP syntax

Descriptor seq_parameter_set_rbsp( ) {  sps_decoding_parameter_set_id u(4)  sps_video_parameter_set_id u(4)  sps_max_sub_layers_minus1 u(3)  sps_reserved_zero_5bits u(5)  profile_tier_level( sps_max_sub_layers_minus1 )  gra_enabled_flag u(1)  sps_seq_parameter_set_id ue(v)  chroma_format_idc ue(v)  if( chroma_format_idc = = 3 )   separate_colour_plane_flag u(1)  pic_width_max_in_luma_samples ue(v)  pic_height_max_in_luma_samples ue(v) {{ sub_pics_present_flag}} {(u(1)}} {{ if( sub_pics_present_flag ) { }} {(   max_grid_idxs_minus1}} {{u(8)}} {{   sub_pic_grid_col_width_minus1}} {{u(v)}} {{   sub_pic_grid_row_height_minus1}} {{u(v)}} {{   for( i = 0; i < NumSubPicGridRows; i++ )}} {{   for( j =0; j < NumSubPicGridCols; j++ )}} {{    sub_pic_grid_idx[ i ][ j ]}} {{u(v)}} {{   for( i = 0; i <= NumSubPics; i++ ) { }} {{   sub_pic_treated_as_pic_flag[ i ]}} {{u(1)}} {{   loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag[ i ]}} {{u(1)}} {{   }}} {{ }}}  bit_depth_luma_minus8 ue(v)  bit_depth_chroma_minus8 ue(v)  log2_max_pic_order_cnt_lsb_minus4 ue(v)  if( sps_max_sub_layers_minus1 > 0 )

It is noted that enabling filtering crossing subpictures is controlled for each subpicture. However, the controlling of enabling filtering crossing slice/tile/brick is controlled in picture level which is signaled once to control all slices/tiles/bricks within one picture.

8. ALF classification is performed in 4×4 unit, that is, all samples within one 4×4 unit share the same classification results. However, to be more precise, samples in a 8×8 window containing current 4×4 block need to calculate their gradients. In this case, 10×10 samples need to be accessed, as depicted in FIG. 30 . If some of the samples are located in different video unit (e.g., different slice/tile/brick/subpicture/above or left or right or bottom “360 virtual boundary” ! above or below “ALF virtual boundary”), how to calculate classification need to be defined.

9. In the VVC design, the four boundary positions (e.g., left vertical/right vertical/above horizontal/below horizontal) are identified. If a sample is located within the four boundary positions, it is marked as available. However, in VVC, a slice could be covering a non-rectangular region, as shown in FIG. 28 . By checking these four boundaries positions, it may mark a wrong availability result. For example, for the blue position in FIG. 28 (top-left point), it is in a different slice from the current block (e.g., the block covering the red position (right-bottom point)) and shall be marked as “unavailable” if the loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is false (e.g., samples across slices are not allowed to be used in ALF). However, by only checking the left vertical/right vertical/above horizontal/below horizontal boundaries of the current block, the blue position will be wrongly marked as “available”.

4. EXAMPLES OF TECHNIQUES AND EMBODIMENTS

The listing below should be considered as examples to explain general concepts. The listed techniques should not be interpreted in a narrow way. Furthermore, these techniques can be combined in any manner.

The padding method used for ALF virtual boundaries may be denoted as ‘Two-side Padding’ wherein if one sample located at (i, j) is padded, then the corresponding sample located at (m, n) which share the same filter coefficient is also padded even the sample is available, as depicted in FIGS. 12-13 .

The padding method used for picture boundaries/360-degree video virtual boundaries, normal boundaries (e.g. top and bottom boundaries) may be denoted as ‘One-side Padding’ wherein if one sample to be used is outside the boundaries, itis copied from an available one inside the picture.

The padding method used for 360-degree video left and right boundaries may be denoted as ‘wrapping-base Padding’ wherein if one sample to be used is outside the boundaries, it is copied using the motion compensated results.

In the following discussion, a sample is “at a boundary of a video unit” may mean that the distance between the sample and the boundary of the video unit is less or no greater than a threshold. A “line” may refer to samples at one same horizontal position or samples at one same vertical position. (e.g., samples in the same row and/or samples in the same column). Function Abs(x) is defined as follows:

${{Abs}(x)} = \left\{ {\begin{matrix} x & ; & {x>=0} \\ {- x} & ; & {x < 0} \end{matrix}.} \right.$

In the following discussion, a “virtual sample” refers to a generated sample which may be different from the reconstructed sample (may be processed by deblocking and/or SAO). A virtual sample may be used to conduct ALF for another sample. The virtual sample may be generated by padding.

‘ALF virtual boundary handling method is enabled for one block’ may indicate that applyVirtualBoundary in the specification is set to true. ‘Enabling virtual boundary’ may indicate that the current block is split to at least two parts by a virtual boundary and the samples located in one part are disallowed to utilize samples in the other part in the filtering process (e.g, ALF). The virtual boundary may be K rows above the bottom boundary of one block.

In the following descriptions, the neighboring samples may be those which are required for the filter classification and/or filtering process.

In the disclosure, a neighbouring sample is “unavailable” if it is out of the current picture, or current sub-picture, or current tile, or current slice, or current brick, or current CTU, or current processing unit (such as ALF processing unit or narrow ALF processing unit), or any other current video unit.

-   -   1. The determination of ‘The bottom boundary of the current         coding tree block is the bottom boundary of the picture’ is         replaced by ‘The bottom boundary of the current coding tree         block is the bottom boundary of the picture or outside the         picture’.         -   a. Alternatively, furthermore, in this case, the ALF virtual             boundary handling method may be disabled.     -   2. Whether to enable the usage of virtual samples (e.g., whether         to enable virtual boundary (e.g., set applyVirtualBoundary to         true or false)) in the in-loop filtering process may depend on         the CTB size.         -   a. In one example, applyVirtualBoundary is always set to             false for a given CTU/CTB size, e.g., for the CTU/CTB size             equal to K×L (e.g., K=L=4).         -   b. In one example, applyVirtualBoundary is always set to             false for certain CTU/CTB sizes no greater than or smaller             than K×L (e.g., K=L=8).         -   c. Alternatively, ALF is disabled for certain CTU/CTB sizes,             such as 4×4, 8×8.     -   3. Whether to enable the usage of virtual samples (e.g, padded         from reconstructed samples) in the in-loop filtering processes         (e.g., ALF) may depend on whether the bottom boundary of the         block is the bottom boundary of a video unit which is in a finer         granularity compared to a picture (e.g., slice/tile/brick) or a         virtual boundary.         -   a. In one example, the ALF virtual boundary handling method             may be enabled (e.g, applyVirtualBoundary is set to true)             for a coding tree block (CTB) if the bottom boundary of the             CTB is the boundary of the video unit or a virtual boundary.             -   i. Alternatively, furthermore, if the bottom boundary is                 nota bottom picture boundary or if the bottom boundary                 is outside the picture, the above method is enabled.         -   b. When the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block             is one of the bottom virtual boundaries of the picture and             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, the ALF virtual boundary handling method may             still be enabled (e.g., applyVirtualBoundary is set to             true).         -   c. In one example, whether to enable the ALF virtual             boundary handling method (e.g., value of             applyVirtualBoundary) for a CTB may only depend on the             relationship between the bottom boundary of the CTB and the             bottom boundary of a picture.             -   i. In one example, applyVirtualBoundary is set to false                 only if the bottom boundary of the CTB is the bottom                 boundary of a picture containing the CTB or if the                 bottom boundary is outside the picture.             -   ii. In one example, applyVirtualBoundary is set to true                 when the bottom boundary of the CTB is NOT the bottom                 boundary of a picture containing the CTB.         -   d. In one example, for when decoding the CTU-C in FIGS.             18A-18C, M×M samples may be filtered with K lines from above             CTU and excluding K lines below the virtual boundary.     -   4. It is proposed to disable the usage of samples across         brick/slice boundaries in the filtering process (e.g., ALF) even         when the signaled controlling usage flags for loop filters         crossing brick/slice boundaries (e.g.,         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag/loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag)         is true.         -   a. Alternatively, furthermore, the signaled             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag/loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_f             lag may only control the filtering process of deblocking             filter and SAO excluding ALF.         -   b. In one example, a virtual sample may be used instead of             the reconstructed sample at the corresponding position to             conduct ALF for another sample.     -   5. When one block (e.g., CTB) contains a sample located at a         boundary of a video unit (such as slice/brick/tile/360-degree         video virtual or normal boundaries boundaries/picture boundary),         how to generate the virtual sample inside or outside the video         unit (e.g., padding methods) for in-loop filtering such as ALF         may be unified for different kinds of boundaries.         -   a. Alternatively, furthermore, the method of virtual             boundaries (e.g., the Two-side Padding method) may be             applied to the block to handle the sample at boundary for             in-loop filtering.         -   b. Alternatively, furthermore, the above methods may be             applied when the block contains a sample located at the             bottom boundary of the video unit.         -   c. In one example, when decoding the K lines of one block,             if the K lines below the virtual boundary of the block             (e.g., the last K lines in CTU-B of FIGS. 17A-17B) and the             bottom boundary of the block is the bottom boundary of a             video unit, virtual samples may be generated in the ALF             classification/filtering process to avoid usage of other             samples outside these K lines, e.g., the Two-side Padding             method may be applied.             -   i. Alternatively, ALF may be disabled for those last K                 lines.         -   d. In one example, when one block is at multiple boundaries,             pixels/samples used for ALF classification may be restricted             to not across any of these multiple boundaries.             -   i. In one example, for a sample, if certain neighboring                 sample of it is “unavailable” (e.g., across any of the                 multiple boundaries), alone or all kinds of                 gradients/directionality may not be calculated for the                 sample.                 -   1. In one example, gradients of the sample may be                     treated as zero.                 -   2. In one example, gradients of the sample may be                     treated as “unavailable” and may not be added to the                     activity (e.g., defined in Eq. (8) of section                     2.6.1.1) derived in the ALF classification process.             -   ii. In one example, the activity/directionality derived                 in the ALF classification process may be scaled by a                 factor when only partial samples used in ALF                 classification process are “available” (e.g., not across                 any of these boundaries).             -   iii. In one example, for a boundary block, suppose the                 gradients/directionality are required to be calculated                 for N samples in the ALF classification process, and the                 gradients can only be calculated for M samples (e.g., if                 certain neighboring sample of a sample is not                 “available”, then the gradient cannot be calculated for                 it), then the activity may be multiplied by N/M.                 -   1. Alternatively, it may be multiplied by a factor                     dependent on N/M E.g., the number may be of M^(N) (N                     is an integer), for example, M=2.         -   e. In one example, gradients of partial samples in a M×N             (e.g., M=N=8 in current design, M columns and N rows) window             may be used for classification.             -   i. For example, for the current N1*N2 (N1=N2=4 in the                 current design) block, the M*N is centered at the N1*N2                 block.             -   ii. In one example, gradients of samples that do not                 need to access samples across any boundaries may be                 used.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, when calculating the                     gradient of a sample locating at one or multiple                     boundaries, padding (e.g., 1-side padding) may be                     performed if some neighboring samples of the current                     sample are “unavailable”.                 -   2. Alternatively, furthermore, above K (e.g.,                     K=1, 2) unavailable lines may be padded if the                     current sample is located at the top boundary of a                     video unit (such as slice/brick/tile/360-degree                     video virtual boundaries or ALF virtual boundaries).                 -   3. Alternatively, furthermore, left K (e.g., K=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded if the current                     sample is located at the left boundary of a video                     unit.                 -   4. Alternatively, furthermore, right K (e.g.,                     K=1, 2) unavailable columns may be padded if the                     current sample is located at the right boundary of a                     video unit.                 -   5. Alternatively, furthermore, bottom K (e.g.,                     K=1, 2) unavailable lines may be padded if the                     current sample is located at the bottom boundary of                     a video unit.                 -   6. Alternatively, furthermore, if the current sample                     is located at the top boundary and the left boundary                     of a video unit, above K1 (e.g, K1=1, 2) unavailable                     lines may be padded first to generate a M*(N+K1)                     window, then, left K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2) unavailable                     columns may be padded to generate a (M+K2)*(N+K1)                     window.                 -    a. Alternatively, left K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded first to generate                     a (M+K2)*N window, then, above K1 (e.g., K1=1, 2)                     unavailable lines may be padded to generate a                     (M+K2)*(N+K1) window.                 -   7. Alternatively, furthermore, if the current sample                     is located at the top boundary and the right                     boundary of a video unit, above K1 (e.g., K1=1, 2)                     unavailable lines may be padded first to generate a                     M*(N+K1) window, then, right K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded to generate a                     (M+K2)*(N+K1) window.                 -    a. Alternatively, right K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded first to generate                     a (M+K2)*N window, then, above K1 (e.g., K1=1, 2)                     unavailable lines may be padded to generate a                     (M+K2)*(N+K1) window.                 -   8. Alternatively, furthermore, if the current sample                     is located at the bottom boundary and the right                     boundary of a video unit, bottom K1 (e.g., K1=1, 2)                     unavailable lines may be padded first to generate a                     M*(N+K1) window, then, right K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded to generate a                     (M+K2)*(N+K1) window.                 -    a. Alternatively, right K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded first to generate                     a (M+K2)*N window, then, bottom K1 (e.g., K1=1, 2)                     unavailable lines may be padded to generate a                     (M+K2)*(N+K1) window.                 -   9. Alternatively, furthermore, if the current sample                     is located at the bottom boundary and the left                     boundary of a video unit, bottom K1 (e.g., K1=1, 2)                     unavailable lines may be padded first to generate a                     M*(N+K1) window, then, left K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded to generate a                     (M+K2)*(N+K1) window.                 -    a. Alternatively, left K2 (e.g., K2=1, 2)                     unavailable columns may be padded first to generate                     a (M+K2)*N window, then, bottom K1 (e.g., K1=1, 2)                     unavailable lines may be padded to generate a                     (M+K2)*(N+K1) window.                 -   10. Alternatively, furthermore, the padded samples                     may be used to calculate gradients.             -   iii. In one example, for a block at the top/bottom                 boundary of a video unit (such as                 slice/brick/tile/360-degree video virtual boundaries or                 ALF virtual boundaries), gradients of samples in a                 M*(N−C1) window may be used for the classification of                 the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the                     top/bottom C1 lines of the M*N window are not used                     in the classification.             -   iv. In one example, for a block at the left/right                 boundary of a video unit, gradients of samples in a                 (M−C1)*N window may be used for the classification of                 the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the                     left/right C1 columns of the M*N window are not used                     in the classification.             -   v. In one example, for a block at the top boundary and                 the bottom boundary of a video unit, gradients of                 samples in a M*(N−C1−C2) window may be used for the                 classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the top                     C1 lines and the bottom C2 lines of the M*N window                     are not used in the classification.             -   vi. In one example, for a block at the top boundary and                 the left boundary of a video unit, gradients of samples                 in a (M−C1)*(N−C2) window may be used for the                 classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the top                     C1 lines and the left C2 columns of the M*N window                     are not used in the classification.             -   vii. In one example, for a block at the top boundary and                 the right boundary of a video unit, gradients of samples                 in a (M−C1)*(N−C2) window may be used for the                 classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the top                     C1 lines and the right C2 columns of the M*N window                     are not used in the classification.             -   viii. In one example, for a block at the bottom boundary                 and the left boundary of a video unit, gradients of                 samples in a (M−C1)*(N−C2) window may be used for the                 classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the                     bottom C1 lines and the left C2 columns of the M*N                     window are not used in the classification.             -   ix. In one example, for a block at the bottom boundary                 and the right boundary of a video unit, gradients of                 samples in a (M−C1)*(N−C2) window may be used for the                 classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the                     bottom C1 lines and the right C2 columns of the M*N                     window are not used in the classification.             -   x. In one example, for a block at the left boundary and                 the right boundary of a video unit, gradients of samples                 in a (M−C1−C2)*N window may be used for the                 classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the left                     C1 columns and the right C2 columns of the M*N                     window are not used in the classification.             -   xi. In one example, for a block at the top boundary, the                 bottom boundary and the left boundary of a video unit,                 gradients of samples in a (M−C3)*(N−C1−C2) window may be                 used for the classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the top                     C1 lines, and the bottom C2 lines and the left C3                     columns of the M*N window are not used in the                     classification.             -   xii. In one example, for a block at the top boundary,                 the bottom boundary and the right boundary of a video                 unit, gradients of samples in a (M−C3)*(N−C1−C2) window                 may be used for the classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the top                     C1 lines, and the bottom C2 lines and the right C3                     columns of the M*N window are not used in the                     classification.                 -   xiii. In one example, for a block at the left                     boundary, the right boundary and the top boundary of                     a video unit, gradients of samples in a                     (M−C1−C2)*(N−C3) window may be used for the                     classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the left                     C1 columns, and the right C2 columns and the top C3                     lines of the M*N window are not used in the                     classification.             -   xiv. In one example, for a block at the left boundary,                 the right boundary and the bottom boundary of a video                 unit, gradients of samples in a (M−C1−C2)*(N−C3) window                 may be used for the classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the left                     C1 columns, and the right C2 columns and the bottom                     C3 lines of the M*N window are not used in the                     classification.             -   xv. In one example, for a block at the left boundary,                 the right boundary, the top boundary and the bottom                 boundary of a video unit, gradients of samples in a                 (M−C1−C2)*(N−C3−C4) window may be used for the                 classification of the block.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, gradients of the left                     C1 columns, and the right C2 columns, the top C3                     lines and the bottom C4 lines of the M*N window are                     not used in the classification.             -   xvi. In one example, C1, C2, C3 and C4 are equal to 2.             -   xvii. In one example, gradients of samples that do not                 have any “unavailable” neighboring samples required in                 the gradient calculation may be used.         -   f. In one example, when one line is at multiple boundaries             (e.g., the distance between the line to the boundary is less             than a threshold), the padding process is performed only             once regardless how many boundaries it may belong to.             -   i. Alternatively, furthermore, how many neighboring                 lines shall be padded may be dependent on the position                 of the current line relative to all the boundaries.             -   ii. For example, how many neighboring lines shall be                 padded may be decided by the distances between the                 current line and the two boundaries, such as when the                 current line is within two boundaries, with the two                 boundaries being above and below.             -   iii. For example, how many neighboring lines shall be                 padded may be decided by the distance between the                 current line and the nearest boundary, such as when the                 current line is within two boundaries, with the two                 boundaries being above and below.             -   iv. For example, how many neighboring lines shall be                 padded may be calculated for each boundary                 independently, and the maximum one is selected as the                 final padded line number.             -   v. In one example, how many neighboring lines shall be                 padded may be decided for each side (e.g., the above                 side and the below side) of the line.             -   vi. In one example, for the two-side padding method, how                 many neighboring lines shall be padded may be decided                 jointly for the two sides.             -   vii. Alternatively, furthermore, the 2-side padding                 method used by ALF is applied.         -   g. In one example, when one line is at multiple boundaries             and there is at least one boundary in each side (e.g., the             above side and the below side) of the line, ALF may be             disabled for it.         -   h. In one example, when the number of the padded lines             required by the current line is larger than a threshold, ALF             may be disabled for the current line.             -   i. In one example, when the number of the padded lines                 in any side is larger than a threshold, ALF may be                 disabled for the current line.             -   ii. In one example, when the total number of the padded                 lines in both sides is larger than a threshold, ALF may                 be disabled for the current line.         -   i. Alternatively, furthermore, the above methods may be             applied when the block contains a sample located at the             bottom boundary of the video unit and the in-loop filtering             such as ALF is enabled for the block.         -   j. Alternatively, furthermore, the above methods may be             applied under certain conditions, such as when the block             contains a sample located at the bottom boundary of the             video unit and filtering crossing the boundaries is             disallowed (e.g.,             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag/loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag/loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_fl             ag is true).         -   k. Proposed method is also applicable to samples/blocks             located at vertical boundaries.     -   6. When a sample is of at least two boundaries of one block         (e.g., at least one which is above current line is the ALF         Virtual boundary, and below is the other boundary), how many         lines to be padded is not purely decided by the distance between         current line relative to the ALF virtual boundary. Instead, it         is determined by the distances between current line relative to         the two boundaries.         -   a. In one example, the number of lines for per-side padding             is set to (M−min (D0, D1)).         -   b. In one example, the number of lines for per-side padding             is set to (M−max (D0, D1)).         -   c. For above example, D0, D1 denote the distance between             current line and the above/below boundaries.         -   d. For above example, M denote the number of lines that ALF             virtual boundary is from the bottom of one CTU.     -   7. At least two ways of selecting samples in the ALF         classification and/or ALF linear or non-linear filtering process         may be defined, with one of them selects samples before any         in-loop filtering method is applied; and the other selects         samples after one or multiple in-loop filtering methods are         applied but before ALF is applied.         -   a. In one example, the selection of different ways may             depend on the location of samples to be filtered.         -   b. In one example, a sample at the bottom boundary of a             video unit (such as CTB) may be selected with the first             method when it is used in ALF for another sample. Otherwise             (it is not at the boundary), the second method is selected.     -   8. It is proposed to disable the usage of samples crossing a         VPDU boundary (e.g., a 64×64 region) in the filtering process.         -   a. In one example, when a sample required by the ALF             classification process is outside the VPDU boundary, or             below the virtual boundary, it may be replaced by a virtual             sample or the classification results for the sample may be             copied from that associated with other samples, such as             padded from available ones.         -   b. In one example, when a sample required by a filtering             process is outside the VPDU boundary, or below the virtual             boundary, it may be replaced by a virtual sample, such as             padded from available ones.         -   c. In one example, the ALF virtual boundary handling method             may be enabled (e.g, applyVirtualBoundary is set to true)             for a block if it contains samples located at the boundary             of a VPDU.         -   d. Alternatively, usage of samples crossing a horizontal             VPDU boundary may be disabled in the filtering process.             -   i. In one example, when a sample required by a filtering                 process is below the horizontal VPDU boundary, or below                 the virtual boundary, it may be replaced by a virtual                 sample, such as padded from available ones.         -   e. Alternatively, usage of samples crossing a vertical VPDU             boundary may be disabled in the filtering process.             -   i. In one example, when a sample required by a filtering                 process is outside the vertical VPDU boundary, or below                 the virtual boundary, it may be replaced by a virtual                 sample, such as padded from available ones.     -   9. Instead of using padded samples (e.g., not unavailable,         above/below virtual boundaries, above/below boundaries of a         video unit) in the ALF classification/filtering process, it is         proposed to use the reconstructed samples before all in-loop         filters.         -   a. Alternatively, furthermore, the concept of two-side             padding is applied via padding samples from the             reconstructed samples before all in-loop filters.             -   i. In one example, if a sample in a filter support is                 from reconstructed samples before all in-loop filters,                 the symmetric (e.g., symmetrical about the origin, e.g.,                 the current sample) sample in the filter support shall                 also uses the reconstructed one before all in-loop                 filters.                 -   1. Suppose the coordinate of the current sample to                     be filtered is (0, 0) and the sample located at                     (i, j) is the reconstructed one before all in-loop                     filters, then the sample located at (−i, −j) is the                     reconstructed one before all in-loop filters.                 -   2. Suppose the coordinate of the current sample to                     be filtered is (x, y) and the sample located at                     (x+i, y+j) is the reconstructed one before all                     in-loop filters, then the sample located at (x−i,                     y−j) is the reconstructed one before all in-loop                     filters.         -   b. Alternatively, furthermore, when In-loop reshaping (a.k.             a LMCS) is enabled, the reconstructed samples before all             in-loop filters are those in the original domain converted             from the reshaped domain.     -   10. Instead of using padded samples (e.g., not unavailable,         above/below virtual boundaries, above/below boundaries of a         video unit) in the ALF filtering process, it is proposed to         employ different ALF filter supports.         -   a. In one example, suppose a sample needs to be padded in             the above method, instead of performing the padding, filter             coefficient associated with the sample is set to be zero.             -   i. In this case, the filter support is modified by                 excluding samples which require to be padded.             -   ii. Alternatively, furthermore, the filter coefficients                 applied to other samples except the current sample is                 kept unchanged, however, the filter coefficient applied                 to current sample may be modified, such as                 ((1<<C_BD)−sum of all filter coefficients applied to                 samples which don't need to be padded) wherein C_BD                 indicates the filter coefficient's bit-depth.                 -   1. Taking FIGS. 18A-18B for example, when filtering                     lines L and I, the filter coefficient c12 applied to                     current sample is modified to be                     ((1<<C_BD)−2*(c4+c5+c6+c7+c8+c9+c10+c11)).         -   b. In one example, suppose a sample (x1, y1) is padded from             (x2, y2) in above method, instead of performing the padding,             filter coefficient associated with (x1, y1) is added to that             of the position (x2, y2) regardless the non-linear filter is             enabled or disabled.             -   i. Alternatively, furthermore, the clipping parameter                 for (x2, y2) may be derived on-the-fly.                 -   1. In one example, it may be set equal to the                     decoded clipping parameter for (x2, y2).                 -   2. Alternatively, it may be set to the returned                     value of a function with the decoded clipping                     parameters for (x1, y1) and (x2,y2) as inputs, such                     as larger value or smaller value.     -   11. Selection of clipping parameters/filter coefficients/filter         supports may be dependent on whether filtering a sample need to         access padded samples (e.g., not unavailable, above/below         virtual boundaries, above/below boundaries of a video unit).         -   a. In one example, different clipping parameters/filter             coefficients/filter supports may be utilized for samples             with same class index but for some of them require accessing             padded samples and other don't.         -   b. In one example, the clipping parameters/filter             coefficients/filter supports for filtering samples which             require to access padded samples may be signaled in             CTU/region/slice/tile level.         -   c. In one example, the clipping parameters/filter             coefficients/filter supports for filtering samples which             require to access padded samples may be derived from that             used for filtering samples which don't require to access             padded samples.             -   i. In one example, bullets 9a or 9b may be applied.     -   12. How to handle a sample at a boundary for in-loop filtering         (such as ALF) may depend on the color component and/or color         format.         -   a. For example, the definition of “at boundary” may be             different for different color components. In one example, a             luma sample is at the bottom boundary if the distance             between it and the bottom boundary is less than T1; a chroma             sample is at the bottom boundary if the distance between it             and the bottom boundary is less than T2. T1 and T2 may be             different.             -   i. In one example, T1 and T2 may be different when the                 color format is not 4:4:4.     -   13. When bottom/top/left/right boundary of one CTU/VPDU is also         a boundary of a slice/tile/brick/sub-region with independent         coding, a fixed order of multiple padding processes is applied.         -   a. In one example, in a first step, the padding method             (e.g., 1-side padding) of slice/tile/brick is firstly             applied. Afterwards, the padding method for handling ALF             virtual boundaries (e.g., 2-side padding method) is further             applied during a second step. In this case, the padded             samples after the first step are marked as available and may             be used to decide how many lines to be padded in the ALF             virtual boundary process. The same rule (e.g., FIGS. 16A-C)             for handling CTUs which are not located at those boundaries             are utilized.     -   14. The proposed methods may be applied to one or multiple         boundaries between two sub-pictures.         -   a. The boundary applying the proposed methods may be a             horizontal boundary.         -   b. The boundary applying the proposed methods may be a             vertical boundary.     -   15. The above proposed methods may be applied to samples/blocks         at vertical boundaries.     -   16. Whether or/and how proposed method is applied at “360         virtual boundary” may be dependent on the position of the “360         virtual boundary”.         -   a. In one example, when the “360 virtual boundary” coincides             with a CTU boundary, proposed method may be applied. E.g.,             Only the 2-side padding may be applied in ALF for samples at             “360 virtual boundary”.         -   b. In one example, when the “360 virtual boundary” does not             coincide with a CTU boundary, proposed method may not be             applied. E.g., only the 1-side padding may be applied in ALF             for samples at “360 virtual boundary”.         -   c. In one example, same padding method may be applied in ALF             for samples at the “360 virtual boundary” regardless the             position of the “360 virtual boundary”.             -   i. For example, the 1-side padding may be applied in ALF                 for samples at “360 virtual boundary”.             -   ii. For example, the 2-side padding may be applied in                 ALF for samples at “360 virtual boundary”.         -   d. In one example, for samples at multiple boundaries             wherein at least one boundary is a “360 virtual boundary”             and at least one of the “360 virtual boundary” does not             coincide with a CTU boundary, proposed method may not be             applied.             -   i. For example, samples across any of these multiple                 boundaries may be padded by 1-side padding.                 -   1. Alternatively, furthermore, if there is a                     “virtual boundary”, 2-side padding may be applied in                     ALF after the 1-side padding.         -   e. In one example, for samples located between two kinds of             boundaries, if one of them is the “360 virtual boundary”,             and the other is not, padding is invoked only once in the             ALF process.             -   i. In one example, the padding method for handling ALF                 virtual boundaries (e.g., the 2-side padding method) may                 be invoked.                 -   1. Alternatively, the padding method for handling                     picture (or slice/tile/brick/sub-picture) boundaries                     (e.g., 1-side padding) may be invoked.             -   ii. Alternatively, two or multiple padding processes may                 be applied in order.                 -   1. In one example, the padding method for handling                     picture (or slice/tile/brick/sub-picture) boundaries                     (e.g., 1-side padding) may be firstly applied,                     afterwards, the padding method for handling ALF                     virtual boundaries (e.g., the 2-side padding method)                     may be further invoked.                 -    a. Alternatively, furthermore, the padded samples                     after the first padding are treated as available in                     the second padding process.             -   iii. In one example, for samples located between two or                 more kinds of boundaries, (e.g, slice boundary/tile                 boundary/brick boundary/360 virtual boundary”/“ALF                 virtual boundary”/sub-picture boundary), if only one of                 the boundaries is the “360 virtual boundary” (as shown                 in FIG. 24 , for example, the first boundary is the “360                 virtual boundary”, and the second boundary is a “ALF                 virtual boundary” or slice/brick/tile                 boundary/sub-picture boundary; or vice versa), proposed                 method may be applied. E.g, only the 2-side padding may                 be applied in ALF for these samples.                 -   1. Alternatively, if these multiple kinds of                     boundaries are either “360 virtual boundary” or                     picture boundary, proposed method may not be                     applied. E.g., only the 1-side padding may be                     applied in ALF for these samples.         -   f. In one example, for samples located between two or more             kinds of boundaries, and if at least one of the boundaries             is the “360 virtual boundary” and it does not coincide with             the CTU boundary, proposed method may not be applied.             -   i. In this case, it may be treated as prior art for                 handling samples only at “360 virtual boundary” but not                 at other kinds of boundaries.             -   ii. In one example, only the 1-side padding may be                 applied in ALF for these samples.         -   g. In one example, for samples located between two or more             kinds of boundaries, and if at least one of the boundaries             is the “360 virtual boundary”, proposed method may not be             applied.             -   i. In this case, it may be treated as prior art for                 handling samples only at “360 virtual boundary” but not                 at other kinds of boundaries.             -   ii. In one example, only the 1-side padding may be                 applied in ALF for these samples.     -   17. When a reference sample required in the ALF filtering         process (e.g., P0i with i being A/B/C/D in FIG. 16C when         filtering the current sample P0) or/and the ALF classification         process is “unavailable”, e.g., due to that the sample is         located in a different video unit (e.g.,         slice/brick/tile/sub-picture) from the current sample and         filtering using samples across the video unit (e.g.,         slice/brick/tile/sub-picture boundaries) is disallowed, the         “unavailable” sample may be padded with “available” samples         (e.g., samples within the same slice/brick/tile/sub-picture with         the current sample).         -   a. In one example, the “unavailable” reference sample may be             first clipped to its nearest “available” horizontal             position, then, the “unavailable” reference sample is             clipped to its nearest “available” vertical position if             necessary.         -   b. In one example, the “unavailable” reference sample may be             first clipped to its nearest “available” vertical position,             then, the “unavailable” sample is clipped to its nearest             “available” horizontal position if necessary.         -   c. In one example, the coordinate of a “unavailable”             reference sample is clipped to the coordinate of its nearest             “available” sample (e.g., smallest distance) in horizontal             direction.             -   i. In one example, for two samples with coordinators                 (x1, y1) and (x2, y2), the horizontal distance between                 them may be calculated as Abs(x1−x2).         -   d. In one example, the coordinate of a “unavailable”             reference sample is clipped to the coordinate of its nearest             “available” sample (e.g., smallest distance) in vertical             direction.             -   i. In one example, for two samples with coordinators                 (x1, y1) and (x2, y2), the vertical distance between                 them may be calculated as Abs(y1−y2).         -   e. In one example, the “unavailable” sample is clipped to             its nearest “available” sample (e.g., smallest distance).             -   i. In one example, for two samples with coordinators                 (x1, y1) and (x2, y2), the distance between them may be                 calculated as (x1−x2)*(x1−x2)+(y1−y2)*(y1−y2).             -   ii. Alternatively, the distance between the two pixels                 may be calculated as Abs(x1−x2)+Abs(y1−y2).         -   f. In one example, the “unavailable” sample may be padded in             a predefined order until a “available” sample is found. An             example is shown in FIG. 31 , wherein Cur is the current             block/CU/PU/CTU.             -   i. For example, vertical “available” sample may be first                 checked, then, horizonal “available” sample may be                 checked.             -   ii. For example, horizonal “available” sample may be                 first checked, then, vertical “available” sample may be                 checked.             -   iii. For example, for the “unavailable” above-left                 neighboring samples (e.g, in region “1”), first, the                 left neighboring samples (e.g., in region “4”) of the                 current block/CU/PU/CTU are checked, if there are no                 “available” samples, the above neighboring samples                 (e.g., in region “2”) are then checked. If there are no                 “available” samples in neither left neighboring samples                 nor above neighboring samples, the top-left sample of                 the current block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the                 “unavailable” sample.                 -   1. Alternatively, for the “unavailable” above-left                     neighboring samples, the above neighboring samples                     of the current block/CU/PU/CTU are checked, if there                     are no “available” samples, the left neighboring                     samples are then checked. If there are no                     “available” samples in neither above neighboring                     samples nor left neighboring samples, the top-left                     sample of the current block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad                     the “unavailable” sample.             -   iv. For example, for the “unavailable” above-right                 neighboring samples (e.g, in region “3”), first, the                 right neighboring samples (e.g., in region “5”) of the                 current block/CU/PU/CTU are checked, if there are no                 “available” samples, the above neighboring samples                 (e.g., in region “2”) are then checked. If there are no                 “available” samples in neither right neighboring samples                 nor above neighboring samples, the top-right sample of                 the current block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the                 “unavailable” sample.                 -   1. Alternatively, for the “unavailable” above-right                     neighboring samples, first, the above neighboring                     samples of the current block/CU/PU/CTU are checked,                     if there are no “available” sample, the right                     neighboring samples are then checked. If there are                     no “available” samples in neither above neighboring                     samples nor right neighboring samples, the top-right                     sample of the current block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad                     the “unavailable” sample.             -   v. For example, for the “unavailable” below-left                 neighboring samples (e.g, in region “6”), first, the                 left neighboring samples (e.g., in region “4”) of the                 current block/CU/PU/CTU are checked, if there are no                 “available” sample, the below neighboring samples (e.g.,                 in region “7”) are then checked. If there are no                 “available” samples in neither left neighboring samples                 nor below neighboring samples, the bottom-left sample of                 the current block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the                 “unavailable” sample.                 -   1. Alternatively, for the “unavailable” below-left                     neighboring samples, first, the below neighboring                     samples of the current block/CU/PU/CTU are checked,                     if there are no “available” sample, the left                     neighboring samples are then checked. If there are                     no “available” samples in neither below neighboring                     samples nor left neighboring samples, the                     bottom-left sample of the current block/CU/PU/CTU is                     used to pad the “unavailable” sample.             -   vi. For example, for the “unavailable” below-right                 neighboring samples, first, the right neighboring                 samples (e.g., in region “5”) of the current                 block/CU/PU/CTU are checked, if there are no “available”                 sample, the below neighboring samples (e.g., in region                 “7”) are then checked. If there are no “available”                 samples in neither right neighboring samples nor below                 neighboring samples, the bottom-right sample of the                 current block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the “unavailable”                 sample.                 -   1. For example, for the “unavailable” below-right                     neighboring samples, first, the below neighboring                     samples of the current block/CU/PU/CTU are checked,                     if there are no “available” sample, the right                     neighboring samples are then checked. If there are                     no “available” samples in neither below neighboring                     samples nor right neighboring samples, the                     bottom-right sample of the current block/CU/PU/CTU                     is used to pad the “unavailable” sample.             -   vii. In one example, for each neighboring region, one or                 multiple samples may be checked in order. Alternatively,                 only one may be checked.             -   viii. Alternatively, furthermore, if none of the                 checking could find an available sample, the value of                 the current sample to be filtered may be used instead.             -   ix. In one example, for the “unavailable”                 above-left/above-right/below-left/below-right                 neighboring samples, they may be always padded by                 samples within the current block/CU/PU/CTU.                 -   1. In one example, for the “unavailable” above-left                     neighboring samples (e.g., in region “1” in FIG. 31                     ), the top-left sample of the current                     block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the “unavailable”                     sample.                 -   2. In one example, for the “unavailable” above-right                     neighboring samples (e.g., in region “3” in FIG. 31                     ), the top-right sample of the current                     block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the “unavailable”                     sample.                 -   3. In one example, for the “unavailable” below-left                     neighboring samples (e.g., in region “6” in FIG. 31                     ), the bottom-left sample of the current                     block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the “unavailable”                     sample.                 -   4. In one example, for the “unavailable” below-right                     neighboring samples (e.g., in region “8” in FIG. 31                     ), the bottom-right sample of the current                     block/CU/PU/CTU is used to pad the “unavailable”                     sample.         -   g. Alternatively, filtering process is disabled for the             current sample.         -   h. Alternatively, the classification process in ALF (e.g.,             gradient calculation for current sample) may be disallowed             to use the unavailable reference samples.     -   18. How to derive the padded sample of unavailable reference         samples may depend on whether the CTU coincides with any         boundaries.         -   a. In one example, when current CTU does not coincide with             any kinds of boundaries, but filtering process (e.g., ALF             classification/ALF filtering process) for a current sample             need to access a reference sample in a different video unit             (e.g., slice), methods described in bullet 16 may be             applied.             -   i. Alternatively, furthermore, when current CTU does not                 coincide with any kinds of boundaries, but filtering                 process (e.g., ALF classification/ALF filtering process)                 for a current sample need to access a reference sample                 in a different video unit (e.g., slice) and filtering                 crossing a slice boundary is disallowed, methods                 described in bullet 16 may be applied.             -   ii. Alternatively, furthermore, when current CTU does                 not coincide with any kinds of boundaries, but filtering                 process (e.g., ALF classification/ALF filtering process)                 for a current sample need to access a reference sample                 in a different video unit (e.g., slice) and a reference                 sample in the same video unit and filtering crossing a                 slice boundary is disallowed, methods described in                 bullet 16 may be applied.         -   b. In one example, when current CTU coincides with at least             one kind of boundary, unified padding methods may be applied             (e.g., 2-side or 1-side padding).             -   i. Alternatively, when current CTU coincides with                 multiple kinds of boundaries and filtering crossing                 those boundaries is disallowed, unified padding methods                 may be applied (e.g., 2-side or 1-side padding).         -   c. In one example, only “unavailable” samples that cannot be             padded by 2-side padding or/and 1-side padding may be padded             using methods described in bullet 16.     -   19. Whether the filtering process (e.g., deblocking, SAO, ALF,         bilateral filtering, Hadamard transform filtering etc.) can         access samples across boundaries of a video unit (e.g.,         slice/brick/tile/sub-picture boundary) may be controlled at         different levels, such as being controlled by itself, instead of         being controlled for all video units in a sequence/picture.         -   a. Alternatively, one syntax element may be signaled for a             slice in PPS/slice header to indicate whether the filtering             process can across the slice boundary for the slice.         -   b. Alternatively, one syntax element may be signaled for a             brick/tile in PPS to indicate whether the filtering process             can across the brick/tile boundary for the brick/tile.         -   c. In one example, syntax elements may be signaled in             SPS/PPS to indicate whether the filtering process can across             the brick boundary or/and tile boundary or/and slice             boundary or/and “360-degree virtual boundary” for the             video/picture.             -   i. In one example, separate syntax elements may be                 signaled for different kinds of boundaries.             -   ii. In one example, one syntax element may be signaled                 for all kinds of boundaries.             -   iii. In one example, one syntax element may be signaled                 for several kinds of boundaries.                 -   1. For example, 1 syntax element may be signaled for                     both brick boundary and tile boundary.         -   d. In one example, syntax element may be signaled in SPS to             indicate whether there are PPS/slice level indications on             the filtering process.             -   i. In one example, separate syntax elements may be                 signaled for different kinds of boundaries.             -   ii. In one example, one syntax element may be signaled                 for all kinds of boundaries.             -   iii. In one example, one syntax element may be signaled                 for several kinds of boundaries.                 -   1. For example, 1 syntax element may be signaled for                     both brick boundary and tile boundary.             -   iv. Indications on whether the filtering process can                 across the slice/brick/tile/sub-picture boundary may be                 signaled in PPS/slice header only when the corresponding                 syntax element in SPS is equal to a certain value.                 -   1. Alternatively, indications on whether the                     filtering process can across the                     slice/brick/tile/sub-picture boundary may not be                     signaled in PPS/slice header when the corresponding                     syntax element in SPS is equal to certain values.                 -    a. In this case, the filtering process may not be                     allowed to across the slice/brick/tile/sub-picture                     boundary if the indication in SPS is equal to a                     certain value.                 -    b. In this case, the filtering process may across                     the slice/brick/tile/sub-picture boundary if the                     indication in SPS is equal to a certain value.     -   20. It is proposed to check whether samples located at         above-left/above-right/below-left/below-right neighboring         regions of current block are in the same video unit (e.g.,         slice/brick/tile/subpicture/360 virtual boundaries) as the         current block in the ALF processes (e.g., classification and/or         filtering processes). Denote the top-left sample of the current         luma coding tree block relative to the top left sample of the         current picture by (x0, y0), denote ctbXSize and ctbYSize as the         CTU width and height respectively.         -   a. In one example, a representative sample located at             above-left region, such as (x0−offsetX0, y0−offsetY0) may be             checked.             -   i. In one example, (offsetX0, offsetY0) may be equal to                 (1, 1), (2, 1) or (1, 2).         -   b. In one example, a representative sample located at             above-right region, such as (x0+offsetX1, y0−offsetY1) may             be checked.             -   i. In one example, (offsetX1, offsetY1) may be equal to                 (ctbXSize, 1), (ctbXSize+1, 1) or (ctbXSize, 2).         -   c. In one example, a representative sample located at             below-left region, such as (x0−offsetX2, y0+offsetY2) may be             checked.             -   i. In one example, (offsetX2, offsetY2) may be equal to                 (1, ctbYSize), (2, ctbYSize) or (1, ctbYSize+1).         -   d. In one example, a representative sample located at             below-right region, such as (x0+offsetX3, y0+offsetY3) may             be checked.             -   i. In one example, (offsetX2, offsetY2) may be equal to                 (ctbXSize, ctbYSize), (ctbXSize+1, ctbYSize) or                 (ctbXSize, ctbYSize+1).         -   e. In one example, if the representative sample in a region             is in a different video unit, and filtering crossing             different video unit is disallowed, then a sample to be             accessed in the region is marked as unavailable.             -   i. In one example, if the representative sample in a                 region is in a different slice, and                 loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0,                 then a sample to be accessed in the region is marked as                 unavailable.             -   ii. In one example, if the representative sample in a                 region is in a different brick, and                 loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0,                 then a sample to be accessed in the region is marked as                 unavailable.             -   iii. In one example, if the representative sample in a                 region is in a different subpicture, and                 loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is                 equal to 0, then a sample to be accessed in the region                 is marked as unavailable. In one example, the SubPicIdx                 is the index of current subpicture including the current                 block.         -   f. In one example, if M of the K representative samples in K             regions are in video units different from the current CTU,             and filtering across different video unit is disallowed,             then a sample to be accessed in the K regions are all marked             as unavailable.             -   i. In one example, M is equal to 1 and K is equal to 2.                 -   1. For example, the K regions may include the                     above-left neighboring region and the above-right                     neighboring region.                 -   2. For example, the K regions may include the                     above-left neighboring region and the below-left                     neighboring region.                 -   3. For example, the K regions may include the                     above-right neighboring region and the below-right                     neighboring region.                 -   4. For example, the K regions may include the                     below-left neighboring region and the below-right                     neighboring region.                 -   5. Alternatively, M may be equal to 2.             -   ii. In one example, M is equal to 1 and K is equal to 3.                 -   1. For example, the K regions may include the                     above-left, the above-right and the below-left                     neighboring regions.                 -   2. For example, the K regions may include the                     above-left, the above-right and the below-right                     neighboring regions.                 -   3. For example, the K regions may include the                     above-right, the below-left and the below-right                     neighboring regions.                 -   4. For example, the K regions may include the                     above-left, the below-left and the below-right                     neighboring regions.                 -   5. Alternatively, M may be equal to 2 or 3.             -   iii. In one example, M is equal to 1 and K is equal                 to 4. E.g., the K regions may include the above-left,                 above-right, below-left and below-right neighboring                 regions.                 -   1. Alternatively, M may be equal to 1 or 2 or 3.             -   iv. In one example, N (M<=N<=K) of the K representative                 samples are checked to determine whether there are M                 representative samples of the N representative samples                 in video units different from the current CTU.                 -   1. In one example, N is equal to M and only M                     predefined representative samples are checked.                 -   2. For example, when M is equal to 1 and K is equal                     to 2, the K regions may include the above-left and                     the above-right neighboring region, only the                     representative sample of the above-left neighboring                     region is checked.                 -    a. Alternatively, only the representative sample of                     the above-right neighboring region is checked.                 -   3. For example, when M is equal to 1 and K is equal                     to 2, the K regions may include the below-left and                     the below-right neighboring region, only the                     representative sample of the below-left neighboring                     region is checked.                 -    a. Alternatively, only the representative sample of                     the below-right neighboring region is checked.                 -   4. For example, when M is equal to 1 and K is equal                     to 2, the K regions are the above-left and the                     below-left neighboring region, only the                     representative sample of the above-left neighboring                     region is checked.                 -    a. Alternatively, only the representative sample of                     the below-left neighboring region is checked.                 -   5. For example, when M is equal to 1 and K is equal                     to 2, the K regions are the above-right and the                     below-right neighboring region, only the                     representative sample of the above-right neighboring                     region is checked.                 -    a. Alternatively, only the representative sample of                     the below-right neighboring region is checked.                 -   6. For example, when M is equal to 1 and K is equal                     to 4, the K regions are the above-left, above-right,                     below-left and the below-right neighboring region,                     only the representative sample of the above-left                     neighboring region is checked.                 -    a. Alternatively, only the representative sample of                     the below-right neighboring region is checked.                 -    b. Alternatively, only the representative sample of                     the below-left neighboring region is checked.                 -    c. Alternatively, only the representative sample of                     the above-right neighboring region is checked.             -   v. In one example, if the representative sample in a                 region is in a different slice, and                 loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0,                 then a sample to be accessed in the region is marked as                 unavailable.             -   vi. In one example, if the representative sample in a                 region is in a different brick, and                 loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0,                 then a sample to be accessed in the region is marked as                 unavailable.             -   vii. In one example, if the representative sample in a                 region is in a different subpicture, and                 loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is                 equal to 0, then a sample to be accessed in the region                 is marked as unavailable. In one example, the SubPicIdx                 is the index of current subpicture including the current                 block.         -   g. In above examples, offsetXi/offsetYi (with i being 0 . .             . 3) are integers.             -   i. Alternatively, furthermore, offsetXi/offsetYi (with i                 being 0 . . . 3) may be set equal to the CTU                 width/height.     -   21. Determination of “availability” of the         above-left/above-right/below-left/below-right neighboring         regions of the CTU may be independent of the         above/left/right/below neighboring regions of the CTU.         -   a. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the above-left neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the above             neighboring region may be determined differently.             -   i. In one example, padding is performed on the above                 neighboring region but not performed on the above-left                 neighboring region if the above neighboring region is                 marked as “unavailable” and the above-left neighboring                 region is marked as “available”.             -   ii. In one example, padding is performed on the                 above-left neighboring region but not performed on the                 above neighboring region if the above-left neighboring                 region is marked as “unavailable” and the above                 neighboring region is marked as “available”.         -   b. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the above-right neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the above             neighboring region may be determined differently.         -   c. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the above-left neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the left             neighboring region may be determined differently.         -   d. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the below-left neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the left             neighboring region may be determined differently.         -   e. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the below-right neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the right             neighboring region may be determined differently.         -   f. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the above-right neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the right             neighboring region may be determined differently.         -   g. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the below-right neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the below             neighboring region may be determined differently.         -   h. In the ALF filtering or/and classification process,             whether to perform padding on the below-left neighboring             region and whether to perform padding on the below             neighboring region may be determined differently.         -   i. In one example, when samples in the above-left or/and             above-right neighboring regions are determined as             “unavailable”, samples in the above neighboring region may             still be determined as “available” (e.g., in case that it is             in the same video unit as the current CTU). E.g., sample             padding may not be performed for the above neighboring             region in the ALF filtering or/and classification process.         -   j. In one example, when samples in the below-left or/and             below-right neighboring regions are determined as             “unavailable”, samples in the below neighboring region may             still be determined as “available” (e.g., in case that it is             in the same video unit as the current CTU). E.g., sample             padding may not be performed for the below neighboring             region in the ALF filtering or/and classification process.         -   k. In one example, when samples in the above-left or/and             below-left neighboring regions are determined as             “unavailable”, samples in the left neighboring region may             still be determined as “available” (e.g., in case that it is             in the same video unit as the current CTU). E.g., sample             padding may not be performed for the left neighboring region             in the ALF filtering or/and classification process.         -   l. In one example, when samples in the above-right or/and             below-right neighboring regions are determined as             “unavailable”, samples in the right neighboring region may             still be determined as “available” (e.g., in case that it is             in the same video unit as the current CTU). E.g., sample             padding may not be performed for the right neighboring             region in the ALF filtering or/and classification process.     -   22. The above proposed methods may be applied not only to ALF,         but also to other kinds of filtering methods that require to         access samples outside current block.         -   a. Alternatively, the above proposed methods may be applied             to other coding tools (non-filtering methods) that require             to access samples outside current block     -   23. Whether to and/or how to apply the above methods may be         determined by:         -   a. A message signaled in the DPS/SPS/VPS/PPS/APS/picture             header/slice header/tile group header/Largest coding unit             (LCU)/Coding unit (CU)/LCU row/group of LCUs/TU/PU             block/Video coding unit         -   b. Position of CU/PU/TU/block/Video coding units         -   c. Block dimension of current block and/or its neighboring             blocks         -   d. Block shape of current block and/or its neighboring             blocks         -   e. Coded information of the current block and/or its             neighboring blocks         -   f. Indication of the color format (such as 4:2:0, 4:4:4)         -   g. Coding tree structure         -   h. Slice/tile group type and/or picture type         -   i. Color component (e.g. may be only applied on chroma             components or luma component)         -   j. Temporal layer ID         -   k. Profiles/Levels/Tiers of a standard

5. EMBODIMENTS

In the sections below, some examples of how current version of the VVC standard be modified to accommodate some embodiments of disclosed technology is described. Newly added parts are indicated in bold italicized underlined text. The deleted parts are indicated using [[ ]].

5.1 Embodiment #1

loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag equal to 1 specifies that in-loop filtering operations may be performed across brick boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag equal to 0 specifies that in-loop filtering operations are not performed across brick boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. The in-loop filtering operations include the deblocking filter, sample adaptive offset filter operations. When not present, the value of loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is inferred to be equal to 1. loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag equal to 1 specifies that in-loop filtering operations may be performed across slice boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. loop_filter_across_slice_enabled_flag equal to 0 specifies that in-loop filtering operations are not performed across slice boundaries in pictures referring to the PPS. The in-loop filtering operations include the deblocking filter, sample adaptive offset filter operations. When not present, the value of loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is inferred to be equal to 0.

5.2 Embodiment #2

FIG. 21 shows processing of CTUs in a picture. The differences compared to FIG. 19 highlighted with the dashed lines.

5.3 Embodiment #3

8.8.5.2 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Luma Samples

Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed luma picture sample array         alfPicture_(L),     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         luma picture sample array alfPicture_(L).         The derivation process for filter index clause 8.8.5.3 is         invoked with the location (xCtb,yCtb) and the reconstructed luma         picture sample array recPicture_(L) as inputs, and filtIdx[x][y]         and transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 as outputs.         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed luma samples         alfPicture_(L)[x][y], each reconstructed luma sample inside the         current luma coding tree block recPicture_(L) [x][y] is filtered         as follows with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1:     -   The array of luma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of luma         clipping values c[j] corresponding to the filter specified by         filtIdx[x][y] is derived as follows with j=0 . . . 11:         -   . . .     -   The luma filter coefficients and clipping values index idx are         derived depending on transposeIdx[x][y] as follows:         -   . . .     -   The locations (h_(x+i),v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−3 . . . 3 are derived as follows:         -   . . .     -   The variable applyVirtualBoundary is derived as follows:         -   If the following condition is true, applyVirtualBoundary is             set equal to 0:             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the picture.         -   Otherwise, applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 1.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1, r2 and r3 are specified in         Table 8-22 according to the horizontal luma sample position y         and applyVirtualBoundary.     -   . . .         8.8.5.4 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Chroma Samples         Inputs of this process are:     -   a reconstructed chroma picture sample array recPicture prior to         the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample array alfPicture,     -   a chroma location (xCtbC, yCtbC) specifying the top-left sample         of the current chroma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         chroma picture sample array alfPicture.         The width and height of the current chroma coding tree block         ctbWidthC and ctbHeightC is derived as follows:         ctbWidthC=CtbSizeY/SubWilthC  (8-1230)         ctbHeightC=CtbSizeY/SubHeightC  (8-1231)         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed chroma samples         alfPicture[x][y], each reconstructed chroma sample inside the         current chroma coding tree block recPicture[x][y] is filtered as         follows with         x=0 . . . ctbWidthC-1,y=0 . . . ctbHeightC−1:     -   The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         chroma samples (x, y) inside the given array recPictue of chroma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 2 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and             xCtbC+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+1)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1232)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−xCtbC−x             is greater than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1233)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1234)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and             yCtbC+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1235)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and             PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−yCtbC−y is greater             than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1236)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1237)     -   The variable applyVirtualBoundary is derived as follows:         -   If the following condition is true, applyVirtualBoundary is             set equal to 0:             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the picture.         -   Otherwise, applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 1.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1 and r2 are specified in         Table 8-22 according to the horizontal luma sample position y         and applyVirtualBoundary.         -   . . .

Alternatively, the condition “he bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is the bottom boundary of the picture” can be replaced by “the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is the bottom boundary of the picture or outside the picture.”

5.4 Embodiment #4

This embodiment shows an example of disallowing using samples below the VPDU region in the ALF classification process (corresponding to bullet 7 in section 4).

8.8.5.3 Derivation Process for ALF Transpose and Filter Index for Luma Samples

Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a luma location (xCtb, yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture,     -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process.         Outputs of this process are     -   the classification filter index array filtIdx[x][y] with x,y=0 .         . . CtbSizeY−1,     -   the transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . .         CtbSizeY−1.         The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPicture of luma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 5 are derived as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1 and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1193)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater than 0         and less than 6 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1194)     -   Otherwise, the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1195)     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1 and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1196)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater than 0         and less than 6 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1197)     -   Otherwise, the following applies:         -   If yCtb+CtbSizeY is greater than or equal to             pic_height_in_luma_samples, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1198)         -   Otherwise, if y is less than CtbSizeY−4, the following             applies:             v _(y+j)=Clip3(0,yCtb+CtbSizeY−5,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1199)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(yCtb+CtbSizeY−4,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1200)             The classification filter index array filtIdx and the             transpose index array transposeIdx are derived by the             following ordered steps:     -   1. The variables filtH[x][y],filtV[x][y],filtD0[x][y] and         filtD1[x][y] with x,y=−2 . . . CtbSizeY+1 are derived as         follows:         -   If both x and y are even numbers or both x and y are uneven             numbers, the following applies:             filtH[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h             _(x−1) ,v _(y)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y)])   (8-1201)             filtV[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h             _(x) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)+1])   (8-1202)             filtD0[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x+1)             ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1203)             filtD1[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x−1)             ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1204)         -   Otherwise, filtH[x][y], filtV[x][y], filtD0[x][y] and             filtD1[x][y] are set equal to 0.     -   2. The variables minY, maxY and ac are derived as follows:         -   If (y<<2) is equal to (min(CtbSizeY, 64)−8) and             (yCtb+CtbSizeY) is less than pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,             minY is set equal to −2, maxY is set equal to 3 and ac is             set equal to 96.         -   Otherwise, if (y<<2) is equal to (min(CtbSizeY, 64)−4) and             (yCtb+CtbSizeY) is less than pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,             minY is set equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 5 and ac is set             equal to 96.         -   Otherwise, minY is set equal to −2 and maxY is set equal to             5 and ac is set equal to 64.     -   3. The variables varTempH1[x][y], varTempV1[x][y],         varTempD01[x][y], varTempD11[x][y] and varTemp[x][y] with x, y=0         . . . (CtbSizeY−1)>>2 are derived as follows:         sumH[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtH[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1205)         sumV[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtV[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1206)         sumD0[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD0[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1207)         sumD1[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD1[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1208)         sumOfHV[x][y]=sumH[x][y]+sumV[x][y]  (8-1209)     -   4. The variables dir1[x][y], dir2[x][y] and dirS[x][y] with         x,y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 are derived as follows:         -   The variables hv1, hv0 and dirHV are derived as follows:         -   The variables d1, d0 and dirD are derived as follows:             -   . . .     -   5. The variable avgVar[x][y] with x,y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 is         derived as follows:         varTab[ ]={0,1,2,2,2,2,2,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,4}  (8-1227)         avgVar[x][y]=varTab[Clip3(0,15,(sumOfHV[x>>2][y>>2]*ac)>>(3+BitDepth_(Y)))]           (8-1228)     -   6. The classification filter index array filtIdx[x][y] and the         transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x=y=0 . . .         CtbSizeY−1 are derived as follows:         transposeTable[ ]={0,1,0,2,2,3,1,3}         transposeIdx[x][y]=transposeTable[dir1[x][y]*2+(dir2[x][y]>>1)]         filtIdx[x][y]=avgVar[x][y]         -   When dirS[x][y] is not equal 0, filtIdx[x][y] is modified as             follows:             filtIdx[x][y]+=(((dir1[x][y]&0x1)<<1)+dirS[x][y])*5  (8-1229)

5.5 Embodiment #5

For samples locate at multiple kinds of boundaries (e.g., slice/brick boundary, 360-degree virtual boundary), the padding process is only invoked once. And how many lines to be padded per side is dependent on the location of current sample relative to the boundaries.

In one example, the ALF 2-side padding method is applied. Alternatively, furthermore, In the symmetric 2-side padding method, when a sample is at two boundaries, e.g., one boundary in the above side and one boundary in the below side, how many samples are padded is decided by the nearer boundary as shown in FIG. 27 . Meanwhile, when deriving the classification information, only the 4 lines between the two boundaries in FIG. 27 are used.

FIG. 26 shows an example of the padding methods if 4 lines of samples are of two boundaries. In one example, the first boundary in FIG. 26 may be the ALF virtual boundary; the second boundary in FIG. 25 may be the slice/tile/brick boundary or the 360-degree virtual boundary.

5.6 Embodiment #6

8.8.5.2 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Luma Samples

Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed luma picture sample array         alfPicture_(L),     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma co ding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         luma picture sample array alfPicture_(L).         The derivation process for filter index clause 8.8.5.3 is         invoked with the location (xCtb,yCtb) and the reconstructed luma         picture sample array recPicture_(L) as inputs, and filtIdx[x][y]         and transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 as outputs.     -   The locations (h_(x+i),v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−3.3 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1197)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater             than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1198)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1199)         -   The following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1202)         -   The variable boundaryPos1 and boundaryPos2 are derived by             invoking the vertical boundary position derivation process             for luma samples as specified in 8.8.5.5 with Ctb equal to             Ctb and y equal to y.

TABLE 8-24 Specification of r1, r2, and r3 according to the horizontal luma sample position y and [[applyVirtualBoundary]] {{boundaryPos1 and boundaryPos2.}} condition r1 r2 r3 ( y = = CtbSizeY − 5 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 4 ) && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) 0 0 0 ( y = = CtbSizeY − 6 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 3 ) && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) 1 1 1 ( y = = CtbSizeY − 7 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 2 ) && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) 1 2 2 otherwise 1 2 3 ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 1 | | y = = boundaryPos1 ) && 0 0 0 ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && (boundaryPos2 = = −1 | | boundaryPos2 >= boundaryPos1 + 8 ) ) ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 2 | | y = = boundaryPos1 + 1) && 1 1 1 ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && ( boundaryPos2 = = −1 | | boundaryPos2 >= boundaryPos1 + 8 ) ) ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 3 | | y = = boundaryPos1 + 2) && 1 2 2 ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && ( boundaryPos2 = = −1 | | boundaryPos2 >= boundaryPos1 + 8 ) ) ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 1 | | y = = boundaryPos1 | | y = = boundaryPos2 − 1 | | y = = 0 0 0 boundaryPos2 ) && ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && boundaryPos2 = = boundaryPos1 + 4 ) ) (y = = boundaryPos1 − 2 | | y = = boundaryPos1 + 1 | | y = = boundaryPos2 − 2 | | y = = 1 1 1 boundaryPos2 + 1 ) && ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && boundaryPos2 = = boundaryPos1 + 4 ) ) ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 3 | | y = = boundaryPos2 + 2 ) && 1 2 2 ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && boundaryPos2 = = boundaryPos1 + 4 ) ) otherwise  1   2  3}} 8.8.5.3 Derivation Process for ALF Transpose and Filter Index for Luma Samples Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture,     -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process.         Outputs of this process are     -   the classification filter index array filtIdx[x][y] with x,y=0 .         . . CtbSizeY−1,     -   the transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . .         CtbSizeY−1.         The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 5 are derived as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1 and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1208)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater than 0         and less than 6 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1209)     -   Otherwise, the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1210)     -   The variable boundaryPos1 and boundaryPos2 are derived by         invoking the vertical boundary position derivation process for         luma samples as specified in 8.8.5.5 with Ctb equal to yCtb and         y equal to y.     -   If boundaryPos1 is equal to −1 and boundaryPos2 is equal to −1         the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1211)     -   Otherwise, if boundaryPos1 is not equal to −1 and boundaryPos2         is equal to −1, the following applies:         -   If y is less than boundaryPos1, the following applies:             v _(y+j)=Clip3(0,yCtb+boundaryPos1−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1215)         -   Otherwise, if y is equal to or greater than boundaryPos1,             the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(yCtb+boundaryPos1,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1216)     -   Otherwise (boundaryPos1 is not equal to −1 and boundaryPos2 is         not equal to −1), the following applies:         -   If y is less than boundaryPos1, the following applies:             v _(y+j)=Clip3(0,yCtb+boundaryPos1−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1215)         -   Otherwise, if y is equal to or greater than boundaryPos2,             the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(yCtb+boundaryPos2,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1216)         -   Otherwise (y is greater than boundaryPos1 and is equal to or             less than boundaryPos2), the following applies:             v             _(y+i)=Clip3(yCtb+boundaryPos1,yCtb+boundaryPos2−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1216)             The classification filter index array filtIdx and the             transpose index array transposeIdx are derived by the             following ordered steps:     -   1. The variables filtH[x][y],filtV[x][y], filtD0[x][y] and         filtD1[x][y] with x,y=−2 . . . CtbSizeY+1 are derived as         follows:         -   If both x and y are even numbers or both x and y are uneven             numbers, the following applies:             filtH[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h             _(x−1) ,v _(y)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y)])  (8-1216)             filtV[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h             _(x) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1217)             filtD0[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x+1)             ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1218)             filtD1[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x−1)             ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1219)         -   Otherwise, filtH[x][y],filtV[x][y],filtD0[x][y] and             filtD1[x][y] are set equal to 0.     -   2. The variables minY, maxY and ac are derived as follows:         -   If (y<<2) is equal to (CtbSizeY−8) and (yCtb+CtbSizeY) is             less than pic_height_in_luma_samples−1, minY is set equal to             −2, maxY is set equal to 3 and ac is set equal to 96.         -   Otherwise, if (y<<2) is equal to (CtbSizeY−4) and             (yCtb+CtbSizeY) is less than pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,             minY is set equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 5 and ac is set             equal to 96.         -   The variable boundaryPos1 and boundaryPos2 are derived by             invoking the vertical boundary position derivation process             for luma samples as specified in 8.8.5.5 with yCtb equal to             yCtb and y equal to y.         -   If boundaryPos1 is not equal to −1 and boundaryPos2 is equal             to −1, the following applies:             -   If y is equal to boundaryPos1−4, minY is set equal to                 −2, maxY is set equal to 3 and ac is set equal to 96.             -   Otherwise, if y is equal to boundaryPos1, minY is set                 equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 5 and ac is set equal                 to 96.             -   Otherwise, minY is set equal to −2 and maxY is set equal                 to 5 and ac is set equal to 64.         -   Otherwise, if boundaryPos1 is not equal to −1 and             boundaryPos2 is not equal to −1, the following applies:             -   If y is equal to boundaryPos1−4, minY is set equal to                 −2, maxY is set equal to 3 and ac is set equal to 96.             -   Otherwise, if y is equal to boundaryPos2,minY is set                 equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 5 and ac is set equal                 to 96.             -   Otherwise, if y is equal to boundaryPos1 and                 boundaryPos2 is equal to or greater than boundaryPos2+8,                 minY is set equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 5 and ac is                 set equal to 96.             -   Otherwise, if y is equal to boundaryPos1 and                 boundaryPos2 is equal to boundaryPos2+4, minY is set                 equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 3 and ac is set equal                 to 128.             -   Otherwise, if y is equal to boundaryPos2−4 and                 boundaryPos2 is equal to or greater than boundaryPos2+8,                 minY is set equal to −2, maxY is set equal to 3 and ac                 is set equal to 96.             -   Otherwise, minY is set equal to −2 and maxY is set equal                 to 5 and ac is set equal to 64.         -   Otherwise (boundaryPos1 is equal to −1 and boundaryPos2 is             equal to −1), minY is set equal to −2 and maxY is set equal             to 5 and ac is set equal to 64.     -   3. The variables sumH[x][y], sumV[x][y], sumD0[x][y],         sumD1[x][y] and sumOfHV[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . (CtbSizeY−1)>>2         are derived as follows:         sumH[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtH[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1220)         sumV[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtV[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1221)         sumD0[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD0[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1222)         sumD1[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD1[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j)         −yCtb] with i=−2 . . . 5, j=minY . . . maxY   (8-1223)         sumOfHV[x][y]=sumH[x][y]+sumV[x][y]  (8-1224)         . . .         8.8.5.4 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Chroma Samples         Inputs of this process are:     -   a reconstructed chroma picture sample array recPicture prior to         the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample array alfPicture,     -   a chroma location (xCtbC, yCtbC) specifying the top-left sample         of the current chroma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         chroma picture sample array alfPicture.         The width and height of the current chroma coding tree block         ctbWidthC and ctbHeightC is derived as follows:         ctbWidthC=CtbSizeY/SubWidthC  (8-1245)         ctbHeightC=CtbSizeY/SubHeightC  (8-1246)         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed chroma samples         alfPicture[x][y], each reconstructed chroma sample inside the         current chroma coding tree block recPicture[x][y] is filtered as         follows with x=0 . . . ctbWidthC−1, y=0 . . . ctbHeightC−1:     -   The locations (h_(+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         chroma samples (x, y) inside the given array recPictue of chroma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 2 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and             xCtbC+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1247)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−xCtbC−x             is greater than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1248)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1249)         -   The following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1252)     -   The variable boundaryPos1 and boundaryPos2 are derived by         invoking the vertical boundary position derivation process for         luma samples as specified in 8.8.5.5 with yCtb equal to yCtb and         y equal to y.         -   The variable boundaryPos1 is set equal to             boundaryPos1/SubWidthC.         -   The variable boundaryPos2 is set equal to             boundaryPos2/SubWidthC.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1 and r2 are specified in         Table 8-24 according to the horizontal luma sample position y         and applyVirtualBoundary.     -   The variable curr is derived as follows:         curr=recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]  (8-1253)     -   The array of chroma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of         chroma clipping values c[j] is derived as follows with j=0 . . .         5:         f[j]=AlfCoeff_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]  (8-1254)         c[j]=AlfClip_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]  (8-1255)     -   The variable sum is derived as follows:         sum=f[0]*(Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[1]*(Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[2]*(Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[3]*(Clip3(−c[3]c[3]recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[3],c[3],recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[4]*(Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x+2) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x−2) ,v         _(y)]−curr))+f[5]*(Clip3(−c[5]c[5]recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[5],c[5],recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v         _(y)]−curr))  (8-1256)         sum=curr+(sum+64)>>7)  (8-1257)     -   The modified filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample         alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y] is derived as follows:         -   If pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag and             pcm_flag[(xCtbC+x)*SubWidthC][(yCtbC+y)*SubHeightC] are both             equal to 1, the following applies:             alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]  (8-1258)         -   Otherwise (pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag is equal to 0 or             pcm_flag[x][y] is equal 0), the following applies:             alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=Clip3(0,(1<<BitDepth_(C))−1,sum)  (8-1259)

TABLE 8-25 [[Specification of r1 and r2 according to the horizontal luma sample position y and applyVirtualBoundary]] [[condition r1 r2 ( y = = ctbHeightC − 2 | | y = = ctbHeightC − 3 ) 0 0 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = ctbHeightC − 1 | | y = = ctbHeightC − 4 ) 1 1 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) otherwise 1 2]]

TABLE 8-25 {{Specification of r1 and r2 according to the horizontal luma sample position y and boundaryPos1 and boundary Pos2}} condition r1 r2 ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 1 | | y = = boundaryPos1 ) && 0 0 ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && ( boundaryPos2 = = −1 | | boundaryPos2 >= boundaryPos1 + 4 ) ) ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 2 | | y = = boundaryPos1 + 1) && 1 1 ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && (boundaryPos2 = = −1 | boundaryPos2 >= boundaryPos1 + 4 ) ) ( y = = boundaryPos1 − 1 | | y = = boundaryPos1 | | y = = boundaryPos2 − 1 | y = = 0 0 boundaryPos2 ) && ( boundaryPos1 > −1 && boundaryPos2 = = boundaryPos1 + 2 ) ) (y = = boundaryPos1 − 2 | | y = = boundaryPos2 + 1 ) && 1 1 (boundaryPos1 > −1 && boundaryPos2 = = boundaryPos1 + 2 )) otherwise 1 2 8.8.5.5 Vertical Boundary Position Derivation Process for Luma Samples Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a luma location yCtb specifying the vertical position of the         top-left sample of the current luma coding tree block relative         to the top left sample of the current picture.     -   a luma location y specifying the vertical position of the         current pixel relative to the top-left sample of the current         luma coding tree block.         Output of this process are:     -   the above vertical boundary position boundaryPos1.     -   the below vertical boundary position boundaryPos2.     -   The variable boundaryPos1 is derived as follows:         -   The variable boundaryPos1 is set equal to −1.         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1 and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY{n} is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             boundaryPos1=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]   (8-1201)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1 and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater             than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             boundaryPos1=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]   (8-1201)     -   The variable boundaryPos2 is derived as follows:         -   The variable boundaryPos2 is set equal to −1.         -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is             the bottom boundary of the brick and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0, the             following applies:             -   If CtbSizeY−y is smaller than 4, the variable                 boundaryPos2 is set equal to CtbSizeY.         -   Otherwise, if the bottom boundary of the current coding tree             block is the bottom boundary of the slice and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0, the             following applies:             -   If CtbSizeY−y is smaller than 4, the variable                 boundaryPos2 is set equal to CtbSizeY.         -   Otherwise, if the top boundary of the current coding tree             block is the top boundary of the brick and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0, the             following applies:             -   If y is smaller than 3, the variable boundaryPos2 is set                 equal to 0.         -   Otherwise, if the top boundary of the current coding tree             block is the top boundary of the slice and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0, the             following applies:             -   If y is smaller than 3, the variable boundaryPos2 is set                 equal to 0.         -   If the variable boundaryPos1 is equal to −1, the following             applies:             -   The variable boundaryPos1 is equal to boundaryPos2.             -   The variable boundaryPos2 is equal to −1.     -   The variable applyVirtualBoundary is derived as follows:         -   If one or more of the following conditions are true,             applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 0:             -   The bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is                 the bottom boundary of the picture.         -   Otherwise, applyVirtualBoundary is set equal to 1.     -   If applyVirtualBoundary is equal to 1, the following applies:         -   If boundaryPos1 is equal to −1, boundaryPos1 is set equal to             CtbSizeY−4.         -   Otherwise, If boundaryPos2 is equal to −1, boundaryPos2 is             set equal to CtbSizeY−4.     -   If boundaryPos1 is not equal to −1 and boundaryPos1 is not equal         to −1, the following applies:         -   If boundaryPos1 is equal to boundaryPos2, boundaryPos2 is             set equal to −1.         -   Otherwise, If boundaryPos1 is greater than boundaryPos2, the             following applies:             -   The variable tmpPos is set equal to boundaryPos2.             -   The variable boundaryPos2 is set equal to boundaryPos1.

The variable boundaryPos1 is set equal to tmpPos.

5.7 Embodiment #7

For a CTU, it may not coincide with any boundaries (e.g., picture/slice/tile/brick/sub-picture boundary). However, it may need to access samples outside the current unit (e.g., picture/slice/tile/brick/sub-picture). If filtering crossing the slice boundary (e.g., loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is false) is disabled, we need to pad the sample outside the current unit.

For example, for the sample 2801 (take luma sample for example) in FIG. 28 , the samples used in ALF filtering process may be padded as in FIG. 29 .

5.8 Embodiment #8

In this embodiment, the following main ideas are applied:

On Enabling ALF Virtual Boundaries:

-   -   For CTUs which are not located in the last CTU row in a picture         (e.g., bottom boundary of CTUs is not bottom boundary of a         picture or exceeds the bottom boundary of a picture), ALF         virtual boundary is enabled, i.e., one CTU may be split to two         or more parts, and samples in one part are disallowed to use         samples in another part.     -   For CTUs which are located in the last CTU row in a picture         (e.g., bottom boundary of CTUs is bottom boundary of a picture         or exceeds the bottom boundary of a picture), ALF virtual         boundary is enabled, i.e., one CTU may be split to two or more         parts, and samples in one part are disallowed to use samples in         another part.

On Padding of Boundaries (Including ALF Virtual Boundaries, Slice/Tile/Brick/Sub-Picture Boundaries, “360 Virtual Boundaries”) in the Classification Process:

For a sample at one (or multiple kinds of) boundary, when neighboring samples across the boundary are disallowed to be used, 1-side padding is performed to pad such neighboring samples.

On Padding of Boundaries (Including ALF Virtual Boundaries, Slice/Tile/Brick/Sub-Picture Boundaries, “360 Virtual Boundaries”) in the ALF Filtering Process:

-   -   For a sample at one (or multiple kinds of) boundary that is a         slice/tile/brick/sub-picture boundary or a “360 virtual         boundary” that coincides with CTU boundary, when neighboring         samples across the boundary are disallowed to be used, 2-side         padding is performed to pad such neighboring samples.     -   For a sample at one (or multiple kinds of) boundary that is a         picture boundary or a “360 virtual boundary” that does not         coincide with CTU boundary, when neighboring samples across the         boundary are disallowed to be used, 1-side padding is performed         to pad such neighboring samples.         8.8.5.2 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Luma Samples         Inputs of this process are:     -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed luma picture sample array         alfPicture_(L),     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         luma picture sample array alfPicture_(L).         The derivation process for filter index clause 8.8.5.3 is         invoked with the location (xCtb,yCtb) and the reconstructed luma         picture sample array recPicture_(L) as inputs, and filtIdx[x][y]         and transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 as outputs.         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed luma samples         alfPicture_(L)[x][y], each reconstructed luma sample inside the         current luma coding tree block recPicture_(L) [X][y] is filtered         as follows with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1:     -   The array of luma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of luma         clipping values c[j] corresponding to the filter specified by         filtIdx[x] [y] is derived as follows with j=0 . . . 11:         -   If AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]             is less than 16, the following applies:             i=AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]  (8-1187)             f[j]=AlfFixFiltCoeff[AlfClassToFiltMap[i][filtIdx[x][y]]][j]  (8-1188)             c[j]=2^(BitdepthY)  (8-1189)         -   Otherwise             (AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize] is             greater than or equal to 16, the following applies:             i=slice_alf_aps_id_luma[AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]−16]               (8-1190)             f[j]=AlfCoeff_(L)[i][filtIdx[x][y]][j]  (8-1191)             c[j]=AlfClip_(L)[i][filtIdx[x][y]][j]  (8-1192)     -   The luma filter coefficients and clipping values index idx are         derived depending on transposeIdx[x][y] as follows:         -   If transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 1, the following             applies:             idx[ ]={9,4,10,8,1,5,11,7,3,0,2,6}  (8-1193)         -   Otherwise, if transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 2, the             following applies:             idx[ ]={0,3,2,1,8,7,6,5,4,9,10,11}  (8-1194)         -   Otherwise, if transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 3, the             following applies:             idx[ ]={9,8,10,4,3,7,11,5,1,0,2,6}  (8-1195)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             idx[ ]={0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11}  (8-1196)     -   The locations (h_(x+i),v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−3 . . . 3 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1197)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is             greater than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1198)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1199)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1200)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is             greater than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1201)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1202)     -   The variable clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are derived by invoking the horizontal boundary         position derivation process for luma samples as specified in         clause 8.8.5.5. with (xCtb, yCtb) and (x, y) as inputs.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1, r2 and r3 are specified in         Table 8-24 according to the horizontal luma sample position y         and clipTopPos and clipBottomPos.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets c1, c2 and c3 are specified in         Table 8-25 according to the vertical luma sample position x and         clipLeftPos and clipRightPos.     -   The variable curr is derived as follows:         curr=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v _(y)]  (8-1203)     -   The variable sum is derived as follows:         sum=f[idx[0]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[0]],c[idx[0]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x)         ,v _(y−r3)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[0]],c[idx[0]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x) ,v         _(y−r3)]−curr))+f[idx[1]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[1]],c[idx[1]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[1]],c[idx[1]]recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 1) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[2]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[2]],c[idx[2]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[2]],c[idx[2]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x)         ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[3]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[3]],c[idx[3]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 1) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[3]],c[idx[3]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[4]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[4]],c[idx[4]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 2) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[4]],c[idx[4]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 2) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[5]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[5]],c[idx[5]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[5]],c[idx[5]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[6]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[6]],c[idx[6]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[6]],c[idx[6]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x)         ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[7]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[7]],c[idx[7]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[7]],c[idx[7]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[8]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[8]],c[idx[8]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 2) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[8]],c[idx[8]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 2) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[9]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[9]],c[idx[9]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 3) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[9]],c[idx[9]],recPicture_(L)[h _(x−c 3)         ,v         _(y)]−curr))+f[idx[10]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[10]],c[idx[10]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 2) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[10]],c[idx[10]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 2) ,v         _(y)]−curr))+f[idx[11]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[11]],c[idx[11]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[11]],c[idx[11]],recPicture_(L)[h         _(x−c 1) ,v _(y)]−curr))  (8-1204)         sum=curr+((sum+64))>>7)  (8-1205)     -   The modified filtered reconstructed luma picture sample         alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+X][yCtb+y] is derived as follows:         -   If pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag and             pcm_flag[xCtb+x][yCtb+y] are both equal to 1, the following             applies:             alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+x][yCtb+y]=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]  (8-1206)         -   Otherwise (pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag is equal to 0 or             pcm_flag[x][y] is equal 0), the following applies:             alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+x][yCtb+y]=Clip3(0,(1<<BitDepth_(y))−1,sum)  (8-1207)

TABLE 8-24 Specification of r1, r2, and r3 according to the horizontal luma sample position y{{, clipTopPos and clipBottomPos}} [[and applyVirtualBoundary]] [[condition r1 r2 r3 ( y = = CtbSizeY − 5 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 4 ) 0 0 0 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = CtbSizeY − 6 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 3 ) 1 1 1 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = CtbSizeY − 7 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 2 ) 1 2 2 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) otherwise 1 2 3]]

{(condition r1 r2 r3 ( y = = clipBottomPos − 1 | | y = = clipTopPos ) 0 0 0 ( y = = clipBottomPos − 2 | | y = = clipTopPos + 1) 1 1 1 ( y = = clipBottomPos − 3 | | y = = clipTopPos + 2) 1 2 2 && (clipBottomPos != clipTopPos + 4) ( y = = clipTopPos + 2 ) && 1 1 1 (clipBottomPos = = clipTopPos + 4) otherwise 1 2 3}}

TABLE 8-24 {{Specification of cl, c2, and c3 according to the vertical luma sample position x, clipLeftPos and clipRightPos}} {{condition c1 c2 c3 (xCtb + x == clipLeftPos || 0 0 0 xCtb + x == clipRightPos −1) (xCtb + x == clipLeftPos +1 || 1 1 1 xCtb + x == clipRightPos −2) (xCtb + x == clipLeftPos +2 || 1 2 2 xCtb + x == clipRightPos −3) otherwise 1 2 3}} 8.8.5.3 Derivation Process for ALF Transpose and Filter Index for Luma Samples Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma co ding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture,     -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process.         Outputs of this process are     -   the classification filter index array filtIdx[x][y] with x,y=0 .         . . CtbSizeY−1,     -   the transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . .         CtbSizeY−1.         The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 5 are derived as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is not         equal to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1208)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is not equal to         0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater than 0 and         less than 6 for any n=0 . . . pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1,         the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1209)     -   Otherwise, the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1210)     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is not         equal to 0, and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1211)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is not equal to         0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater than 0 and         less than 6 for any n=0 . . . pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1,         the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1212)     -   Otherwise, the following applies:     -   If yCtb+CtbSizeY is greater than or equal to         pic_height_in_luma_samples, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1213)     -   The variable clipLeftPos clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are derived by invoking the horizontal boundary         position derivation process for luma samples as specified in         clause 8.8.5.5, with (xCtb, yCtb) and (x, y).     -   If clipTopPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(clipTopPos,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1213)     -   If clipBottomPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         v _(y+j)=Clip3(0,clipBottomPos−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1213)     -   If clipLeftPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(clipLeftPos,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1213)     -   If clipRightPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,clipRightPos−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1213)         The classification filter index array filtIdx and the transpose         index array transposeIdx are derived by the following ordered         steps:

-   1. The variables filtH[x][y], filtV[x][y], filtD0[x][y] and     filtD1[x][y] with x,y=−2 . . . CtbSizeY+1 are derived as follows:     -   If both x and y are even numbers or both x and y are uneven         numbers, the following applies:         filtH[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y)])  (8-1216)         filtV[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1217)         filtD0[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1218)         filtD1[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x+1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1219)         -   Otherwise, filtH[x][y],filtV[x][y],filtD0[x][y] and             filtD1[x][y] are set equal to 0.

-   2.

-   3. The variables sumH[x][y], sumV[x][y], sumD0[x][y], sumD1[x][y]     and sumOfHV[x][y] with x,y=0 . . . (CtbSizeY−1)>>2 are derived as     follows:     The variables minY, maxY and ac are derived as follows:     -   If clipTopPos is not equal to −128 and clipBottomPos is equal to         −128, the following applies:         -   If (y<<2) is equal to clipTopPos, minY is set equal to 0,             maxY is set equal to 5.     -   Otherwise, if clipTopPos is equal to −128 and clipBottomPos is         not equal to −128, the following applies:         -   If (y<<2) is equal to (clipBottomPos−4), minY is set equal             to −2, maxY is set equal to 3.     -   Otherwise, if clipTopPos is not equal to −128 and clipBottomPos         is not equal to −128, the following applies:         -   minY is set equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 3.     -   Otherwise, minY is set equal to −2 and maxY is set equal to 5.         The variables minX, maxX and ac are derived as follows:     -   If clipLeftPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         -   If (x<<2) is equal to clipLeftPos, minX is set equal to 0,             maxX is set equal to 5.     -   Otherwise, if clipRightPos is not equal to −128, the following         applies:         -   If(x<<2) is equal to (clipRightPos−4), minX is set equal to             −2, maxX is set equal to 3.     -   Otherwise, minX is set equal to −2 and maxX is set equal to 5.

The variable ac is derived according to Table 8-24.

TABLE 8-24 {{Specification of ac according to minX, minY, maxX, maxY}} {{(maxY − minY + 8*8 8*6 8*4 6*6 6*4 1) * (maxX − minX + 1) ac 64 96 128 112 192}} sumH[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtH[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1220) sumV[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtV[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1221) sumD0[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD0[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1222) sumD1[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD1[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1223) sumOfHV[x][y]=sumH[x][y]+sumV[x][y]  (8-1224)

-   4. The variables dir1[x][y], dir2[x][y] and dirS[x][y] with x,y=0 .     . . CtbSizeY−1 are derived as follows:     -   The variables hv1, hv0 and dirHV are derived as follows:         -   If sumV[x>>2][y>>2] is greater than sumH[x>>2][y>>2], the             following applies:             hv1=sumV[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1225)             hv0=sumH[x>>2][y>>2]8-1226)             dirHV=1  (8-1227)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             hv1=sumH[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1228)             hv0=sumV[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1229)             dirHV=3  (8-1230)     -   The variables d1, d0 and dirD are derived as follows:         -   If sumD0[x>>2][y>>2] is greater than sum D1[x>>2][y>>2], the             following applies:             d1=sumD0[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1231)             d0=sumD1[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1232)             dirD=0  (8-1233)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             d1=sumD1[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1234)             d0=sumD0[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1235)             dirD=2  (8-1233)     -   The variables hvd1, hvd0, are derived as follows:         hvd1=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?d1:hv1  (8-1237)         hvd0=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?d0:hv0  (8-1238)     -   The variables dirS[x][y], dir1[x][y] and dir2[x][y] derived as         follows:         dir1[x][y]=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?dirD:dirHV  (8-1239)         dir2[x][y]=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?dirHV:dirD  (8-1240)         dirS[x][y]=(hvd1>2*hvd0)?1:((hvd1*2>9*hvd0)?2:0)  (8-1241) -   5. The variable avgVar[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 is derived     as follows:     varTab[ ]={0,1,2,2,2,2,2,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,4}  (8-1242)     avgVar[x][y]=varTab[Clip3(0,15,(sumOfHV[x>>2][y>>2]*ac)>>(3+BitDepth_(Y)))]       (8-1243) -   6. The classification filter index array filtIdx[x] [y] and the     transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x=y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1     are derived as follows:     transposeTable[ ]={0,1,0,2,2,3,1,3}     transposeIdx[x][y]=transposeTable[dir1[x][y]*2+(dir2[x][y]>>1)]     filtIdx[x][y]=avgVar[x][y]     -   When dirS[x][y] is not equal 0, filtIdx[x][y] is modified as         follows:         filtIdx[x][y]+=(((dir1[x][y]&0x1)<<1)+dirS[x][y])*5  (8-1244)         8.8.5.4 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Chroma Samples         Inputs of this process are:     -   a reconstructed chroma picture sample array recPicture prior to         the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample array alfPicture,     -   a chroma location (xCtbC, yCtbC) specifying the top-left sample         of the current chroma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         chroma picture sample array alfPicture.         The width and height of the current chroma coding tree block         ctbWidthC and ctbHeightC is derived as follows:         ctbWidthC=CtbSizeY/SubWidthC  (8-1245)         ctbHeightC=CtbSizeY/SubHeightC  (8-1246)         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed chroma samples         alfPicture[x][y], each reconstructed chroma sample inside the         current chroma coding tree block recPicture[x][y] is filtered as         follows with x=0 . . . ctbWidthC−1, y=0 . . . ctbHeightC−1:     -   The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         chroma samples (x, y) inside the given array recPicture of         chroma samples with i,j=−2 . . . 2 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and             xCtbC+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1247)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and             PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−xCtbC−x is greater             than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1248)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1249)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and             yCtbC+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1250)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and             PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−yCtbC−y is greater             than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1251)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1252)     -   The variable clipLeftPos clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are derived by invoking the horizontal boundary         position derivation process for luma samples as specified in         cluase 8.8.5.5 with (xCtbC*SubWidthC, yCtbC*SubWidthC) and         (x*SubWidthC, y*SubWidthC) as inputs.         -   The variable clipTopPos is set equal to             clipLeftPos/SubWidthC.         -   The variable clipBottomPos is set equal to             clipRightPos/SubWidthC.         -   The variable clipTopPos is set equal to             clipTopPos/SubWidthC.         -   The variable clipBottomPos is set equal to             clipBottomPos/SubWidthC.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1 and r2 are specified in         Table 8-27 according to the horizontal luma sample position y,         clipTopPos and clipBottomPos.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets c1 and c2 are specified in         Table 8-28 according to the vertical luma sample position x,         clipLeftPos and clipRightPos.     -   The variable curr is derived as follows:         curr=recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]  (8-1253)     -   The array of chroma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of         chroma clipping values c[j] is derived as follows with j=0 . . .         5:         f[j]=AlfCoeff_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]  (8-1254)         c[j]=AlfClip_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]  (8-1255)     -   The variable sum is derived as follows:         sum=f[0]*(Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[1]*(Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x−c 1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[2]*(Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[3]*(Clip3(−c[3]c[3]recPicture[h _(x−c 1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[3],c[3],recPicture[h _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[4]*(Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x+c 2) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x−c 2) ,v         _(y)]−curr))+f[5]*(Clip3(−c[5],c[5]recPicture[h _(x+c 1) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[5],c[5],recPicture[h _(x−c 1) ,v         _(y)]−curr))  (8-1256)         sum=curr+(sum+64)>>7)  (8-1257)     -   The modified filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample         alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y] is derived as follows:         -   If pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag and             pcm_flag[(xCtbC+x)*SubWidthC][(yCtbC+y)*SubHeightC] are both             equal to 1, the following applies:             alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]  (8-1258)         -   Otherwise (pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag is equal to 0 or             pcm_flag[x][y] is equal 0), the following applies:             alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=Clip3(0,(1<<BitDepth_(C))−1,sum)  (8-1259)

TABLE 8-27 Specification of r1 and r2 according to the horizontal luma sample position y{{, clipTopPos and clipBottomPos}} [[and applyVirtualBoundary]] [[condition r1 r2 ( y = = ctbHeightC − 2 | | y = = ctbHeightC − 3 ) 0 0 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = ctbHeightC − 1 | | y = = ctbHeightC − 4 ) 1 1 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) otherwise 1 2]]

{{condition r1 r2 (y = = clipBottomPos − 1 | | y = = clipTopPos ) 0 0 ( y = = clipBottomPos − 2 | | y = = clipTopPos + 1 ) 1 1 && (clipBottomPos != clipTopPos + 2 ) ( y = = clipTopPos + 1) && 0 0 (clipBottomPos = = clipTopPos + 2 ) otherwise 1 2}}

TABLE 8-28 {{Specification of c1 and c2 according to vertical luma sample position x, clipLeftPos and clipRightPos}} {{condition c1 c2 (xCtbC + x == clipLeftPos || 0 0 xCtbC + x == clipRightPos − 1 ) (xCtbC + x == clipLeftPos + 1 || 1 1 xCtbC + x == clipRightPos − 2) otherwise 1 2}} 8.8.5.5 ALF Boundary Position Derivation Process for Samples Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a luma location (xCtb, yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.     -   a luma location (x, y) specifying the current sample relative to         the top-left sample of the current luma coding tree block         Output of this process are:     -   the left vertical boundary position clipLeftPos.     -   the right vertical boundary position clipRightPos.     -   the above horizontal boundary position clipTopPos.     -   the below horizontal boundary position clipBottomPos.         The variable clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are set equal to −128.         The variable clipTopPos is modified as follows:     -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is not         the bottom boundary of the picture and y−(CtbSizeY−4) is greater         than or equal to 0, the variable clipTopPos is set equal to         Ctb+CtbSizeY−4.     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to 0,         PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is not equal to         pic_height_in_luma_samples−1 or 0, and         yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is greater than or equal to 0         and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipTopPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]  (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if y is less than 3, and the top boundary of the         current coding tree block is not the top boundary of the         picture, and one of the following conditions are true, the         variable clipTopPos is set equal to yCtb:         -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the             top boundary of the brick,             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the             top boundary of the slice,             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the             top boundary of the sub-picture             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.             The variable clipBottomPos is modified as follows:     -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is not         the bottom boundary of the picture and CtbSizeY−4−y is greater         than 0 and is less than 4, the variable clipBottomPos is set         equal to yCtb+CtbSizeY−4.     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to 0,         PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is not equal to         pic_height_in_luma_samples−1 or 0, and         PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater than 0 and less         than 4 for any n=0 . . . pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the         following applies:         clipBottomPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]   (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if CtbSizeY−y is less than 4, and the bottom boundary         of the current coding tree block is not the bottom boundary of         the picture, and one of the following conditions are true, the         variable clipBottomPos is set equal to yCtb+CtbSizeY.         -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is             the bottom boundary of the brick, and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is             the bottom boundary of the slice, and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is             the bottom boundary of the sub-picture, and             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.             The variable clipLeftPos is modified as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to         0, PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is not equal to         pic_width_in_luma_samples−1 or 0, and         xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater than or equal to 0         and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipLeftPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]  (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if x is less than 3, the left boundary of the current         coding tree block is not the left boundary of the picture and         one of the following conditions are true, the variable         clipLeftPos is set equal to xCtb         -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the             left boundary of the brick, and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the             left boundary of the slice, and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the             left boundary of the sub-picture, and             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.             The variable clipRightPos is modified as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to         0, PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is not equal to         pic_width_in_luma_samples−1 or 0, and         PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater than 0 and less         than 4 for any n=0 . . . pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the         following applies:         clipRightPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]  (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if CtbSizeY−x is less than 4, and the right boundary         of the current coding tree block is not the right boundary of         the picture, and one of the following conditions are true, the         variable clipRightPos is set equal to xCtb+CtbSizeY         -   If the right boundary of the current coding tree block is             the right boundary of the brick, and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the right boundary of the current coding tree block is             the right boundary of the slice, and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   if the right boundary of the current coding tree block is             the right boundary of the sub-picture, and             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.

The specific value −128 used in above embodiment may be replaced by other values, such as −K wherein for example, K is greater than or no smaller than the number of lines shifted from a CTU bottom boundary (e.g, K=−5).

Alternatively, the conditional check of “PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is not equal to pic_height_in_luma_samples−1 or 0” could be further removed based on that PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is in the range of 1 to

Ceil(pic_height_in_luma_samples÷8)−1, inclusive.

Alternatively, one flag may be used to mark whether each sample need to be handled in a different way if it is located at video unit boundaries.

5.9 Embodiment #9

In this embodiment, the following main ideas are applied:

On enabling ALF virtual boundaries:

-   -   For CTUs which are not located in the last CTU row in a picture         (e.g., bottom boundary of CTUs is not bottom boundary of a         picture or exceeds the bottom boundary of a picture), ALF         virtual boundary is enabled, i.e., one CTU may be split to two         or more parts, and samples in one part are disallowed to use         samples in another part.     -   For CTUs which are located in the last CTU row in a picture         (e.g., bottom boundary of CTUs is bottom boundary of a picture         or exceeds the bottom boundary of a picture), ALF virtual         boundary is enabled, i.e., one CTU may be split to two or more         parts, and samples in one part are disallowed to use samples in         another part.

On padding of boundaries (including ALF virtual boundaries, slice/tile/brick/sub-picture boundaries, “360 virtual boundaries”) in the classification process:

-   -   For a sample at one (or multiple kinds of) boundary, when         neighboring samples across the boundary are disallowed to be         used, 1-side padding is performed to pad such neighboring         samples.

On padding of boundaries (including ALF virtual boundaries, slice/tile/brick/sub-picture boundaries, “360 virtual boundaries”) in the ALF filtering process:

-   -   For a sample at one (or multiple kinds of) boundary that is a         slice/tile/brick/sub-picture boundary or a “360 virtual         boundary” that coincides with CTU boundary, when neighboring         samples across the boundary are disallowed to be used, 2-side         padding is performed to pad such neighboring samples.     -   For a sample at one (or multiple kinds of) boundary that is a         picture boundary or a “360 virtual boundary” that does not         coincide with CTU boundary, when neighboring samples across the         boundary are disallowed to be used, 1-side padding is performed         to pad such neighboring samples.         8.8.5.2 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Luma Samples         Inputs of this process are:     -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed luma picture sample array         alfPicture_(L),     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         luma picture sample array alfPicture_(L).         The derivation process for filter index clause 8.8.5.3 is         invoked with the location (xCtb,yCtb) and the reconstructed luma         picture sample array recPicture_(L) as inputs, and filtIdx[x][y]         and transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 as outputs.         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed luma samples         alfPicture_(L)[x][y], each reconstructed luma sample inside the         current luma coding tree block recPicture_(L) [x][y] is filtered         as follows with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1:     -   The array of luma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of luma         clipping values c[j] corresponding to the filter specified by         filtIdx[x][y] is derived as follows with j=0 . . . 11:         -   If AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]             is less than 16, the following applies:             i=AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]  (8-1187)             f[j]=AlfFixFiltCoeff[AlfClassToFiltMap[i][filtIdx[x][y]]][j]  (8-1188)             c[j]=2^(BitdepthY)  (8-1189)         -   Otherwise             (AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize] is             greater than or equal to 16, the following applies:             i=slice_alf_aps_id_luma[AlfCtbFiltSetIdxY[xCtb>>Log2CtbSize][yCtb>>Log2CtbSize]−16]               (8-1190)             f[j]=AlfCoeff_(L)[i][filtIdx[x][y]][j]  (8-1191)             c[j]=AlfClip_(L)[i][filtIdx[x][y]][j]  (8-1192)     -   The luma filter coefficients and clipping values index idx are         derived depending on transposeIdx[x][y] as follows:         -   If transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 1, the following             applies:             idx[ ]={9,4,10,8,1,5,11,7,3,0,2,6}  (8-1193)         -   Otherwise, if transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 2, the             following applies:             idx[ ]={0,3,2,1,8,7,6,5,4,9,10,11}  (8-1194)         -   Otherwise, if transposeIndex[x][y] is equal to 3, the             following applies:             idx[ ]={9,8,10,4,3,7,11,5,1,0,2,6}  (8-1195)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             idx[ ]={0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11}  (8-1196)     -   The locations (h_(x+i),v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−3.3 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1197)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is             greater than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1198)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1199)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1200)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]-yCtb−y is             greater than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1201)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1202)     -   The variables clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are derived by invoking the ALF boundary position         derivation process as specified in clause 8.8.5.5 with (xCtb,         yCtb) and (x, y) as inputs.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1, r2 and r3 are specified in         Table 8-24 according to the vertical luma sample position y,         clipTopPos and clipBottomPos.     -   The sample position offsets c1, c2 and c3 are specified in Table         8-25 according to the horizontal luma sample position x,         clipLeftPos and clipRightPos.     -   The variable curr is derived as follows:         curr=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v _(y)]  (8-1203)         -   The variable sum is derived as follows:             sum=f[idx[0]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[0]],c[idx[0]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x) ,v             _(y+r3)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[0]],c[idx[0]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x) ,v             _(y−r3)]−curr))+f[idx[1]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[1]],c[idx[1]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c1) ,v             _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[1]],c[idx[1]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c1) ,v             _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[2]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[2]],c[idx[2]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x) ,v             _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[2]],c[idx[2]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x) ,v             _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[3]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[3]],c[idx[3]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c1) ,v             _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[3]],c[idx[3]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c1) ,v             _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[idx[4]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[4]],c[idx[4]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c2) ,v             _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[4]],c[idx[4]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c2) ,v             _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[5]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[5]],c[idx[5]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c1) ,v             _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[5]],c[idx[5]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c1) ,v             _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[6]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[6]],c[idx[6]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x) ,v             _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[6]],c[idx[6]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x) ,v             _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[7]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[7]],c[idx[7]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c1) ,v             _(y−r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[7]],c[idx[7]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c1) ,v             _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[8]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[8]],c[idx[8]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c2) ,v             _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[8]],c[idx[8]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c2) ,v             _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[idx[9]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[9]],c[idx[9]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c3) ,v             _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[9]],c[idx[9]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c3) ,v             _(y)]−curr))+f[idx[10]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[10]],c[idx[10]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c2) ,v             _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[10]],c[idx[10]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c2) ,v             _(y)]−curr))+f[idx[11]]*(Clip3(−c[idx[11]],c[idx[11]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x+c1) ,v             _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[idx[11]],c[idx[11]],recPicture_(L)[h             _(x−c1) ,v _(y)]−curr))             sum=curr+((sum+64)>>7)  (8-1205)     -   The modified filtered reconstructed luma picture sample         alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+x][yCtb+y] is derived as follows:         -   If pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag and             pcm_flag[xCtb+x][yCtb+y] are both equal to 1, the following             applies:             alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+x][yCtb+y]=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]  (8-1206)         -   Otherwise (pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag is equal to 0 or             pcm_flag[x][y] is equal 0), the following applies:             alfPicture_(L)[xCtb+x][yCtb+y]=Clip3(0,(1<<BitDepth_(Y))−1,sum)  (8-1207)

TABLE 8-24 Specification of r1, r2, and r3 according to the [[horizontal]] {{vertical}} luma sample position y {{, clipTopPos and clipBottomPos}} [[and applyVirtualBoundary condition r1 r2 r3 ( y = = CtbSizeY − 5 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 4 ) && 0 0 0 ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = CtbSizeY − 6 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 3 ) && 1 1 1 ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = CtbSizeY − 7 | | y = = CtbSizeY − 2 ) && 1 2 2 ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) otherwise 1 2 3

]] {{Condition r1 r2 r3 ( yCtb + y = = clipBottomPos − 1 | | 0 0 0 yCtb + y = = clipTopPos ) ( yCtb + y = = clipBottomPos − 2 | | 1 1 1 yCtb + y = = clipTopPos + 1) ( yCtb + y = = clipBottomPos − 3 | | 1 2 2 yCtb + y = = clipTopPos + 2) && (clipBottomPos != clipTopPos + 4) ( yCtb + y = = clipTopPos + 2 ) && 1 1 1 (clipBottomPos = = clipTopPos + 4) Otherwise 1 2 3}}

TABLE 8-25 {{ Specification of c1, c2, and c3 according to the horizontal luma sample position x, clipLeftPos and clipRightPos }} {{Condition c1 c2 c3 ( xCtb + x = = clipLeftPos | | 0 0 0 xCtb + x = = clipRightPos − 1 ) ( xCtb + x = = clipLeftPos +1 | | 1 1 1 xCtb + x = = clipRightPos − 2 ) ( xCtb + x = = clipLeftPos +2 | | 1 2 2 xCtb + x = = clipRightPos − 3 ) Otherwise 1 2 3}} 8.8.5.3 Derivation Process for ALF Transpose and Filter Index for Luma Samples Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture,     -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process.         Outputs of this process are     -   the classification filter index array filtIdx[x][y] with x,y=0 .         . . CtbSizeY−1,     -   the transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . .         CtbSizeY−1.         The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 5 are derived as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is not         equal to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1208)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is             greater than 0 and less than 6 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1209)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1210)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1211)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is             greater than 0 and less than 6 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1212)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1213)     -   The variables clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are derived by invoking the ALF boundary position         derivation process as specified in clause 8.8.5.5. with (xCtb,         yCtb) and (x, y).     -   If clipTopPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(clipTopPos,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1213)     -   If clipBottomPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         v _(y+i)=Clip3(0,clipBottomPos−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1213)     -   If clipLeftPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)Clip3(clipLeftPos,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1213)     -   If clipRightPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,clipRightPos−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1213)         The classification filter index array filtIdx and the transpose         index array transposeIdx are derived by the following ordered         steps:

-   1. The variables filtH[x][y], filtV[x][y], filtD0[x][y] and     filtD1[x][y] with x,y=−2 . . . CtbSizeY+1 are derived as follows:     -   If both x and y are even numbers or both x and y are uneven         numbers, the following applies:         filtH[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y)])  (8-1216)         filtV[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1217)         filtD0[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1218)         filtD1[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPicture[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1219)     -   Otherwise, filtH[x][y],filtV[x][y],filtD0[x][y] and filtD1[x][y]         are set equal to 0.

-   2.

-   3. The variables sumH[x][y], sumV[x][y], sumD0[x][y], sumD1[x][y]     and sumOfHV[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . (CtbSizeY−1)>>2 are derived as     follows:     -   The variables minY and maxY are derived as follows:         -   If clipTopPos is not equal to −128 and clipBottomPos is             equal to −128, the following applies:             -   If (y<<2) is equal to clipTopPos, minY is set equal to                 0, maxY is set equal to 5.         -   Otherwise, if clipTopPos is equal to −128 and clipBottomPos             is not equal to −128, the following applies:             -   If (y<<2) is equal to (clipBottomPos−4), minY is set                 equal to −2, maxY is set equal to 3.         -   Otherwise, if clipTopPos is not equal to −128 and             clipBottomPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:             -   minY is set equal to 0, maxY is set equal to 3.         -   Otherwise, minY is set equal to −2 and maxY is set equal to             5.     -   The variables minX, maxX and ac are derived as follows:         -   If clipLeftPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:             -   If (x<<2) is equal to clipLeftPos, minX is set equal to                 0, maxX is set equal to 5.     -   Otherwise, if clipRightPos is not equal to −128, the following         applies:         -   If (x<<2) is equal to (clipRightPos−4). minX is set equal to             −2, maxX is set equal to 3.         -   Otherwise, minX is set equal to −2 and maxX is set equal to             5.     -   The variable ac is derived according to table 8-26.

TABLE 8-26 {{ Specification of ac according to minX, minY, maxX, maxY}} {{(maxY − minY + 8*8 8*6 8*4 6*6 6*4 1) * (maxX − minX + 1) ac 64 96 128 112 192)} sumH[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtH[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1220) sumV[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtV[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1221) sumD0[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD0[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1222) sumD1[x][y]=Σ_(i)Σ_(j)filtD1[h _((x<<2)+i) −xCtb][v _((y<<2)+j) −yCtb] with i=minX . . . maxX, j=minY . . . maxY  (8-1223) sumOfHV[x][y]=sumH[x][y]+sumV[x][y]  (8-1224)

-   4. The variables dir1[x][y], dir2[x][y] and dirS[x][y] with x,y=0 .     . . CtbSizeY−1 are derived as follows:     -   The variables hv1, hv0 and dirHV are derived as follows:         -   If sumV[x>>2][y>>2] is greater than sumH[x>>2][y>>2], the             following applies:             hv1=sumV[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1225)             hv0=sumH[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1226)             dirHV=1  (8-1227)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             hv1=sumH[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1228)             hv0=sumV[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1229)             dirHV=3  (8-1230)     -   The variables d1, d0 and dirD are derived as follows:         -   If sumD0[x>>2][y>>2] is greater than sumD1[x>>2][y>>2], the             following applies:             d1=sumD0[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1231)             d0=sumD1[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1232)             dirD=0  (8-1233)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             d1=sumD1[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1234)             d0=sumD0[x>>2][y>>2]  (8-1235)             dirD=2  (8-1236)     -   The variables hvd1, hvd0, are derived as follows:         hvd1=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?d1:hv1  (8-1237)         hvd0=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?d0:hv0  (8-1238)     -   The variables dirS[x][y], dir1[x][y] and dir2[x][y] derived as         follows:         dir1[x][y]=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?dirD:dirHV  (8-1239)         dir2[x][y]=(d1*hv0>hv1*d0)?dirHV:dirD  (8-1240)         dirS[x][y]=(hvd1>2*hvd0)?1:((hvd1*2>9*hvd0)?2:0)  (8-1241) -   5. The variable avgVar[x][y] with x,y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 is derived     as follows:     varTab[ ]={0,1,2,2,2,2,2,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,4}  (8-1242)     avgVar[x][y]=varTab[Clip3(0,15,(sumOfHV[x>>2][y>>2]*ac)>>(3+BitDepth_(Y)))]       (8-1243) -   6. The classification filter index array filtIdx[x][y] and the     transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x=y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1     are derived as follows:     transposeTable[ ]={0,1,0,2,2,3,1,3}     transposeIdx[x][y]=transposeTable[dir1[x][y]*2+(dir2[x][y]>>1)]     filtIdx[x][y]=avgVar[x][y]     -   When dirS[x] [y] is not equal 0, filtIdx[x][y] is modified as         follows:         filtIdx[x][y]+=(((dir1[x][y]&0x1)<<1)+dirS[x][y])*5  (8-1244)         8.8.5.4 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Chroma Samples         Inputs of this process are:     -   a reconstructed chroma picture sample array recPicture prior to         the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample array alfPicture,     -   a chroma location (xCtbC, yCtbC) specifying the top-left sample         of the current chroma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         chroma picture sample array alfPicture.         The width and height of the current chroma coding tree block         ctbWidthC and ctbHeightC is derived as follows:         ctbWidthC=CtbSizeY/SubWidthC  (8-1245)         ctbHeightC=CtbSizeY/SubHeightC  (8-1246)         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed chroma samples         alfPicture[x][y], each reconstructed chroma sample inside the         current chroma coding tree block recPicture[x][y] is filtered as         follows with x=0 . . . ctbWidthC−1, y=0 ctbHeightC−1:     -   The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         chroma samples (x, y) inside the given array recPicture of         chroma samples with i,j=−2 . . . 2 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and             xCtbC+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1247)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and             PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−xCtbC−x is greater             than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1248)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1249)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and             yCtbC+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1250)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is not equal to         0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−yCtbC−y is greater         than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1251)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1252)     -   The variables clipLeftPos clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are derived by invoking the horizontal boundary         position derivation process for luma samples as specified in         clause 8.8.5.5, with (xCtbC*SubWidthC, yCtbC*SubHeightC) and         (x*SubWidthC, y*SubHeightC) as inputs.         -   The variable clipLeftPos is set equal to             clipLeftPos/SubWidthC.         -   The variable clipRightPos is set equal to             clipRightPos/SubWidthC.         -   The variable clipTopPos is set equal to             clipTopPos/SubHeightC.         -   The variable clipBottomPos is set equal to             clipBottomPos/SubHeightC.     -   The reconstructed sample offsets r1 and r2 are specified in         Table 8-27 according to the vertical chroma sample position y,         clipTopPos and clipBottomPos.     -   The sample position offsets c1 and c2 are specified in Table         8-28 according to the horizontal chroma sample position x,         clipLeftPos and clipRightPos.     -   The variable curr is derived as follows:         curr=recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]  (8-1253)     -   The array of chroma filter coefficients f[j] and the array of         chroma clipping values c[j] is derived as follows with j=0.5:         f[j]=AlfCoeff_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]  (8-1254)         c[j]=AlfClip_(C)[slice_alf_aps_id_chroma][j]  (8-1255)     -   The variable sum is derived as follows:         sum=f[0]*(Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r2)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[0],c[0],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r2)]−curr))+f[1]*(Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x+c1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[1],c[1],recPicture[h _(x−c1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[2]*(Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[2],c[2],recPicture[h _(x) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[3]*(Clip3(−c[3]c[3]recPicture[h _(x−c1) ,v         _(y+r1)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[3],c[3],recPicture[h _(x+c1) ,v         _(y−r1)]−curr))+f[4]*(Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x+c2) ,v         _(y)]−curr)+Clip3(−c[4],c[4],recPicture[h _(x−c2) ,v         _(y)]−curr))+f[5]*(Clip3(−c[5],c[5],recPicture[h _(x+c1) ,v         _(y)]−curr))+Clip3(−c[5],c[5],recPicture[h _(x−c1) ,v         _(y)]−curr))  (8-1256)         sum=curr+(sum+64)>>7)  (8-1257)     -   The modified filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample         alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y] is derived as follows:         -   If pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag and             pcm_flag[(xCtbC+x)*SubWidthC][(yCtbC+y)*SubHeightC] are both             equal to 1, the following applies:             alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=recPicture_(L)[h _(x) ,v             _(y)]  (8-1258)     -   Otherwise (pcm_loop_filter_disabled_flag is equal to 0 or         pcm_flag[x][y] is equal 0), the following applies:         alfPicture[xCtbC+x][yCtbC+y]=Clip3(0,(1<<BitDepth_(C))−1,sum)  (8-1259)

TABLE 8-27 Specification of r1 and r2 according to the [[horizontal luma]] {{vertical chroma}} sample position y {{, clipTopPos and clipBottomPos}} [[and applyVirtualBoundary condition r1 r2 ( y = = ctbHeightC − 2 | | y = = ctbHeightC − 3 ) 0 0 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) ( y = = ctbHeightC − 1 | | y = = ctbHeightC − 4 ) 1 1 && ( applyVirtualBoundary = = 1 ) otherwise 1 2

]] {{Condition r1 r2 ( yCtbC + y = = clipBottomPos − 1 | | 0 0 yCtbC + y = = clipTopPos ) ( yCtbC + y = = clipBottomPos − 2 | | 1 1 yCtbC + y = = clipTopPos + 1 ) && (clipBottomPos != clipTopPos + 2 ) ( yCtbC + y = = clipTopPos + 1) && 0 0 (clipBottomPos = = clipTopPos + 2 ) Otherwise 1 2}}

TABLE 8-28 {{ Specification of c1 and c2 according to horionztal chroma sample position x clipLeftPos and clipRightPos)}} {{Condition c1 c2 (xCtbC + x = = clipLeftPos | | 0 0 xCtbC + x = = clipRightPos − 1 ) (xCtbC + x = = clipLeftPos + 1 | | 1 1 xCtbC + x = = clipRightPos − 2) Otherwise 1 2}} 8.8.5.5 ALF Boundary Position Derivation Process Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a luma location (xCtb, yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.     -   a luma location (x, y) specifying the current sample relative to         the top-left sample of the current luma coding tree block,

Output of this process are:

-   -   the left vertical boundary position clipLeftPos,     -   the right vertical boundary position clipRightPos,     -   the above horizontal boundary position clipTopPos,     -   the below horizontal boundary position clipBottomPos,

The variables clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos and clipBottomPos are set equal to −128.

The variable clipTopPos is modified as follows:

-   -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is not         the bottom boundary of the picture and y−(CtbSizeY−4) is greater         than or equal to 0, the variable clipTopPos is set equal to         yCtb+CtbSizeY−4.     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to 0,         and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is greater than or equal         to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipTopPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]  (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if y is less than 3, and the top boundary of the         current coding tree block is not the top boundary of the         picture, and one or more of the following conditions are true,         the variable clipTopPos is set equal to yCtb:         -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the             top boundary of the brick, and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the             top boundary of the slice, and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the             top boundary of the sub-picture, and             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.

The variable clipBottomPos is modified as follows:

-   -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is not         the bottom boundary of the picture and CtbSizeY−4−y is greater         than 0 and is less than 4, the variable clipBottomPos is set         equal to yCtb+CtbSizeY−4.     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1. PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to 0, and         PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater than 0 and less         than 4 for an n=0 . . . pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the         following applies:         clipBottomPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]   (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if CtbSizeY−y is less than 4, and the bottom boundary         of the current coding tree block is not the bottom boundary of         the picture, and one or more of the following conditions are         true, the variable clipBottomPos is set equal to yCtb+CtbSizeY.         -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is             the bottom boundary of the brick, and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is             the bottom boundary of the slice, and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is             the bottom boundary of the sub-picture, and             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.

The variable clipLeftPos is modified as follows:

-   -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is equal         to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater than or         equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipLeftPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]  (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if x is less than 3, the left boundary of the current         coding tree block is not the left boundary of the picture and         one or more of the following conditions are true, the variable         clipLeftPos is set equal to xCtb         -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the             left boundary of the brick, and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the             left boundary of the slice, and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the             left boundary of the sub-picture, and             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.

The variable clipRightPos is modified as follows:

-   -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is equal         to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater than 0         and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipRightPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]  (8-1201)     -   Otherwise, if CtbSizeY−x is less than 4, and the right boundary         of the current coding tree block is not the right boundary of         the picture, and one or more of the following conditions are         true, the variable clipRightPos is set equal to xCtb+CtbSizeY         -   If the right boundary of the current coding tree block is             the right boundary of the brick, and             loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   If the right boundary of the current coding tree block is             the right boundary of the slice, and             loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.         -   if the right boundary of the current coding tree block is             the right boundary of the sub-picture, and             loop_filter_across_sub_pic_enabled_flag is equal to 0.

The specific value −128 used in above embodiment may be replaced by other values, such as −K wherein for example, K is greater than or no smaller than the number of lines shifted from a CTU bottom boundary (e.g, K=−5).

Alternatively, one flag may be used to mark whether each sample need to be handled in a different way if it is located at video unit boundaries.

5.10 Embodiment #10

8.8.5.2 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Luma Samples

Inputs of this process are:

-   -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed luma picture sample array         alfPicture_(L),     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         luma picture sample array alfPicture_(L).         The derivation process for filter index clause 8.8.5.3 is         invoked with the location (xCtb,yCtb) and the reconstructed luma         picture sample array recPicture_(L) as inputs, and filtIdx[x][y]         and transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1 as outputs.         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed luma samples         alfPicture_(L)[x][y], each reconstructed luma sample inside the         current luma coding tree block recPicture_(L) [x][y] is filtered         as follows with x, y=0 . . . CtbSizeY−1:         . . .     -   The locations (h_(x+i),v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−3.3 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1229)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is             greater than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1230)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1231)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is             greater than or equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1232)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is             greater than 0 and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1233)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1234)     -   The variables clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos,         clipBottomPos, clipTopLeftFlag, clipTopRightFlag,         clipBottomLeftFlag and clipBottomRightFlag are derived by         invoking the ALF boundary position derivation process as         specified in clause 8.8.5.5 with (xCtb,yCtb) and (x,y) as         inputs.     -   If clipTopLeftFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)<xCtb)&&(v_(y+j)<yCtb):         h _(x+i) =xCtb  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb  (8-1245)     -   If clipTopRightFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)>xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY) && (v_(y+j)<yCtb):         h _(x+i) =xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb  (8-1245)     -   If clipBottomLeftFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)<xCtb)&&(y_(y+j)>=yCtb+CtbLog2SizeY):         h _(x+i) =xCtb  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)     -   If clipBottomRightFlag is equal to true, the following applies         if (h_(x+i)>=xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY) && (v_(y+j)=yCtb+CtbLog2SizeY):         h _(x+i) =xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)     -   The vertical sample position offsets y1, y2 and y3 are specified         in Table 8-20 according to the vertical luma sample position y,         clipLeftPos and clipRightPos.     -   The horizontal sample position offsets x1, x2 and x3 are         specified in Table 8-21 according to the horizontal luma sample         position x, clipLeftPos and clipRightPos.         . . .         8.8.5.3 Derivation Process for ALF Transpose and Filter Index         for Luma Samples         Inputs of this process are:     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma co ding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture,     -   a reconstructed luma picture sample array recPicture_(L) prior         to the adaptive loop filtering process.         Outputs of this process are     -   the classification filter index array filtIdx[x][y] with x,y=0 .         . . CtbSizeY−1,     -   the transpose index array transposeIdx[x][y] with x, y=0 . . .         CtbSizeY−1.         The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         luma samples (x,y) inside the given array recPictue of luma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 5 are derived as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is not         equal to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n],pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1239)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is not equal to         0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater than 0 and         less than 6 for any n=0 . . . pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1,         the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1240)     -   Otherwise, the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1241)     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is not         equal to 0, and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is greater         than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n],pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1242)     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is not equal to         0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater than 0 and         less than 6 for any n=0 . . . pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1,         the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1243)     -   Otherwise, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1244)     -   The variables clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos,         clipBottomPos, clipTopLeftFlag, clipTopRightFlag,         clipBottomLeftFlag and clipBottomRightFlag are derived by         invoking the ALF boundary position derivation process as         specified in clause 8.8.5.5 with (xCtb,yCtb) and (x,y) as         inputs.     -   If clipTopPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         v         _(y+j)=Clip3(clipTopPos,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1245)     -   If clipBottomPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         v _(y+j)=Clip3(0,clipBottomPos−1,yCtb+y+j)  (8-1246)     -   If clipLeftPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         h         _(x+i)=Clip3(clipLeftPos,pic_height_in_luma_samples−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1247)     -   If clipRightPos is not equal to −128, the following applies:         h _(x+i)=Clip3(0,clipRightPos−1,xCtb+x+i)  (8-1248)     -   If clipTopLeftFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)<xCtb) && (v_(y+j)<yCtb):         h _(x+i) =xCtb  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb  (8-1245)     -   If clipTopRightFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)>=xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY)&&(v_(y+j)<yCtb):         h _(x+i) =xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb  (8-1245)     -   If clipBottomLeftFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)<xCtb)&&(v_(y+j)>=Ctb+CtbLog2SizeY):         h _(x+i) =xCtb  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)     -   If clipBottomRightFlag is equal to true, the following applies         if (h_(x+i)>=xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY) && (v_(y+j)>=yCtb+CtbLog2SizeY):         h _(x+i) =xCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtb+CtbLog2SizeY−1  (8-1245)         The classification filter index array filtIdx and the transpose         index array transposeIdx are derived by the following ordered         steps:

-   1. The variables filtH[x][y], filtV[x][y], filtD0[x][y] and     filtD1[x][y] with x,y=−2 . . . CtbSizeY+1 are derived as follows:     -   If both x and y are even numbers or both x and y are not even         numbers, the following applies:         filtH[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPictue[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y)])  (8-1249)         filtV[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPictue[h _(x)         ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1250)         filtD0[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPictue[h         _(x−1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x+1) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1251)         filtD1[x][y]=Abs((recPicture[h _(x) ,v _(y)]<<1)−recPictue[h         _(x+1) ,v _(y−1)]−recPicture[h _(x−1) ,v _(y+1)])  (8-1249)         -   Otherwise, filtH[x][y], filtV[x][y], filtD0[x][y] and             filtD1[x][y] are set equal to 0.             . . .             8.8.5.3 Coding Tree Block Filtering Process for Chroma             Samples             Inputs of this process are:     -   a reconstructed chroma picture sample array recPicture prior to         the adaptive loop filtering process,     -   a filtered reconstructed chroma picture sample array alfPicture,     -   a chroma location (xCtbC, yCtbC) specifying the top-left sample         of the current chroma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture,     -   an alternative chroma filter index altIdx.         Output of this process is the modified filtered reconstructed         chroma picture sample array alfPicture.         The width and height of the current chroma coding tree block         ctbWidthC and ctbHeightC is derived as follows:         ctbWidthC=CtbSizeY/SubWidthC  (8-1278)         ctbHeightC=CtbSizeY/SubHeightC  (8-1279)         For the derivation of the filtered reconstructed chroma samples         alfPicture[x][y], each reconstructed chroma sample inside the         current chroma coding tree block recPicture[x][y] is filtered as         follows with x=0 . . . ctbWidthC−1, y=0 . . . ctbHeightC−1:     -   The locations (h_(x+i), v_(y+j)) for each of the corresponding         chroma samples (x, y) inside the given array recPictue of chroma         samples with i,j=−2 . . . 2 are derived as follows:         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0 and             xCtbC+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1280)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0 and             PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−xCtbC−x is greater             than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1281)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             h             _(x+i)=Clip3(0,pic_width_in_luma_samples/SubWidthC−1,xCtbC+x+i)  (8-1282)         -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag             is equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0 and             yCtbC+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC is greater             than or equal to 0 and less than 2 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1283)         -   Otherwise, if             pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is             equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is             not equal to 0 and             PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−yCtbC−y is greater             than 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .             pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1284)         -   Otherwise, the following applies:             v             _(y+j)=Clip3(0,pic_height_in_luma_samples/SubHeightC−1,yCtbC+y+j)  (8-1285)             -   The variables clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos,                 clipBottomPos, clipTopLeftFlag, clipTopRightFlag,                 clipBottomLeftFlag and clipBottomRightFlag are derived                 by invoking the ALF boundary position derivation process                 as specified in clause 8.8.5.5 with                 (xCtbC*SubWidthC,yCtbC*SubHeightC) and                 (x*SubWidthC,y*SubHeightC) as inputs.     -   If clipTopLeftFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)<xCtbC)&&(v_(y+j)<yCtbC):         h _(x+i) =xCtbC  (8-1245)         v _(x+j) =yCtbC  (8-1245)     -   If clipTopRightFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)>=xCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubWidthC) && (v_(y+j)<yCtbC):         h _(x+i) =xCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubWidthC−1  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtbC  (8-1245)     -   If clipBottomLeftFlag is equal to true, the following applies if         (h_(x+i)<xCtbC) && (v_(y+j)>=yCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubHeightC):         h _(x+i) =xCtbC  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubWidthC−1  (8-1245)     -   If clipBottomRightFlag is equal to true, the following applies         if (h_(x+i)>=xCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubWidthC) &&         (v_(y+j)>=yCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubHeightC):         h _(x+i) =xCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubWidthC−1  (8-1245)         v _(y+j) =yCtbC+CtbLog2SizeY/SubWidthC−1  (8-1245)         -   The variable clipLeftPos is set equal to             clipLeftPos/SubWidthC.         -   The variable clipRightPos is set equal to             clipRightPos/SubWidthC.         -   The variable clipTopPos is set equal to             clipTopPos/SubHeightC.         -   The variable clipBottomPos is set equal to             clipBottomPos/SubHeightC.             . . .             8.5.5.5 ALF Boundary Position Derivation Process             Inputs of this process are:     -   a luma location (xCtb,yCtb) specifying the top-left sample of         the current luma coding tree block relative to the top left         sample of the current picture,     -   a luma location (x,y) specifying the current sample relative to         the top-left sample of the current luma coding tree block.         Output of this process are:     -   the left vertical boundary position clipLeftPos,     -   the right vertical boundary position clipRightPos,     -   the above horizontal boundary position clipTopPos,     -   the below horizontal boundary position clipBottomPos,     -   the top left boundary flag clipTopLeftFlag.     -   the top right boundary flag clipTopRightFlag.     -   the bottom left boundary flag clipBottomLeftFlag.     -   the bottom right boundary flag clipBottomRightFlag.         The variables clipLeftPos, clipRightPos, clipTopPos and         clipBottomPos are set equal to −128.         The variables clipTopLeftFlag, clipTopRightFlag,         clipBottomLeftFlag and clipBottomRightFlag are set equal to         false.         The variable clipTopPos is modified as follows:     -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is not         the bottom boundary of the picture and y−(CtbSizeY−4) is greater         than or equal to 0, the variable clipTopPos is set equal to         yCtb+CtbSizeY−4.     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to 0,         and yCtb+y−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is greater than or equal         to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipTopPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]  (8-1292)     -   Otherwise, if y is less than 3, and the top boundary of the         current coding tree block is not the top boundary of the         picture, and one or more of the following conditions are true,         the variable clipTopPos is set equal to yCtb:     -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the top         boundary of the brick, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the top         boundary of the slice, and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the top boundary of the current coding tree block is the top         boundary of the subpicture, and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.         The variable clipBottomPos is modified as follows:     -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is not         the bottom boundary of the picture and CtbSizeY−4−y is greater         than 0 and is less than 4, the variable clipBottomPos is set         equal to yCtb+CtbSizeY−4.     -   Otherwise, if         pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is equal         to 1, PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] % CtbSizeY is equal to 0,         PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n] is not equal to         pic_height_in_luma_samples−1 or 0, and         PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]−yCtb−y is greater than 0 and less         than 4 for any n=0 . . . pps_num_hor_virtual_boundaries−1, the         following applies:         clipBottomPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosY[n]  (8-1293)     -   Otherwise, if CtbSizeY−y is less than 4, and the bottom boundary         of the current coding tree block is not the bottom boundary of         the picture, and one or more of the following conditions are         true, the variable clipBottomPos is set equal to yCtb+CtbSizeY:     -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is the         bottom boundary of the brick, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is the         bottom boundary of the slice, and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the bottom boundary of the current coding tree block is the         bottom boundary of the subpicture, and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.         The variable clipLeftPos is modified as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is equal         to 0, and xCtb+x−PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] is greater than or         equal to 0 and less than 3 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipLeftPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]  (8-1294)     -   Otherwise, if x is less than 3, the left boundary of the current         coding tree block is not the left boundary of the picture and         one or more of the following conditions are true, the variable         clipLeftPos is set equal to xCtb:     -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the         left boundary of the brick, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the         left boundary of the slice, and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the left boundary of the current coding tree block is the         left boundary of the subpicture, and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.         The variable clipRightPos is modified as follows:     -   If pps_loop_filter_across_virtual_boundaries_disabled_flag is         equal to 1, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n] % CtbSizeY is equal         to 0, and PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]−xCtb−x is greater than 0         and less than 4 for any n=0 . . .         pps_num_ver_virtual_boundaries−1, the following applies:         clipRightPos=PpsVirtualBoundariesPosX[n]  (8-1295)     -   Otherwise, if Ctb SizeY−x is less than 4, and the right boundary         of the current coding tree block is not the right boundary of         the picture, and one or more of the following conditions are         true, the variable clipRightPos is set equal to xCtb+CtbSizeY:     -   If the right boundary of the current coding tree block is the         right boundary of the brick, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the right boundary of the current coding tree block is the         right boundary of the slice, and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   if the right boundary of the current coding tree block is the         right boundary of the subpicture, and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.         The variable clipTopLeftFlag is modified as follows:     -   If one or more of the following conditions are true, the         variable clipTopLeftFlag is set equal to true:     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb−CtbSizeY,         yCtb−CtbSizeY) are in different bricks, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb−CtbSizeY,         yCtb−CtbSizeY) are in different slices and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb−CtbSizeY,         yCtb−CtbSizeY) are in different subpictures, and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.         The variable clipTopRightFlag is modified as follows:     -   If one or more of the following conditions are true, the         variable clipTopRightFlag is set equal to true:     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb+CtbSizeY,         yCtb−CtbSizeY) are in different bricks, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb+CtbSizeY,         yCtb−CtbSizeY) are in different slices, and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb+CtbSizeY,         yCtb−CtbSizeY) are in different subpictures, and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.         The variable clipBottomLeftFlag is modified as follows:     -   If one or more of the following conditions are true, the         variable clipBottomLeftFlag is set equal to true:     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb−CtbSizeY,         yCtb+CtbSizeY) are in different bricks, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb−CtbSizeY,         yCtb+CtbSizeY) are in different slices, and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, yCtb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb−CtbSizeY,         yCtb+CtbSizeY) are in different subpictures, and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.         The variable clipBottomRightFlag is modified as follows:     -   If one or more of the following conditions are true, the         variable clipBottomRightFlag is set equal to true:     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, Ctb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb+CtbSizeY         Ctb+CtbSizeY) are in different bricks, and         loop_filter_across_bricks_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, Ctb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb+CtbSizeY,         Ctb+CtbSizeY) are in different slices, and         loop_filter_across_slices_enabled_flag is equal to 0.     -   If the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb, Ctb) and         the coding tree block covering the position (xCtb+CtbSizeY,         Ctb+CtbSizeY) are in different subpictures and         loop_filter_across_subpic_enabled_flag[SubPicIdx] is equal to 0.

FIG. 22 is a block diagram of a video processing apparatus 2200. The apparatus 2200 may be used to implement one or more of the methods described herein. The apparatus 2200 may be embodied in a smartphone, tablet, computer, Internet of Things (IoT) receiver, and so on. The apparatus 2200 may include one or more processors 2202, one or more memories 2204 and video processing hardware 2206. The processor(s) 2202 may be configured to implement one or more methods described in the present document. The memory (memories) 2204 may be used for storing data and code used for implementing the methods and techniques described herein. The video processing hardware 2206 may be used to implement, in hardware circuitry, some techniques described in the present document. In some embodiments, the video processing hardware 2206 may be internal or partially internal to the processor 2202 (e.g., graphics processor unit).

In some embodiments, the video coding methods may be implemented using an apparatus that is implemented on a hardware platform as described with respect to FIG. 22 .

FIG. 23 is a flowchart of an example method 2300 of video processing. The method includes determining (2302), for a conversion between a current video block of a video and a bitstream representation of the current video block, one or more interpolation filters to use during the conversion, wherein the one or more interpolation filters are from multiple interpolation filters for the video and performing (2304) the conversion using the one or more interpolation filters.

Various solutions and embodiments described in the present document are further described using a list of solutions.

Section 4, item 1 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

1. A method of video processing, comprising: performing a conversion between video blocks of a video picture and a bitstream representation thereof, wherein the video blocks are processed using logical groupings of coding tree blocks, wherein the coding tree blocks are processed based on whether a bottom boundary of a bottom coding tree block is outside a bottom boundary of the video picture.

2. The method of solution 1, wherein the processing the coding tree block includes performing an adaptive loop filtering of sample values of the coding tree block by using samples within the coding tree block.

3. The method of solution 1, wherein the processing the coding tree block includes performing an adaptive loop filtering of sample values of the coding tree block by disabling splitting the coding tree block into two parts according to virtual boundaries.

Section 4, item 2 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

4. A method of video processing, comprising: determining, based on a condition of a coding tree block of a current video block, a usage status of virtual samples during an in-loop filtering; and performing a conversion between the video block and a bitstream representation of the video block consistent with the usage status of virtual samples.

5. The method of solution 4, wherein, a logical true value of the usage status indicates that the current video block is split at least to two parts by a virtual boundary and filtering samples in one part is disallowed to utilize the information from another part.

6. The method of solution 4, wherein, a logical true value of the usage status indicates virtual samples are used during the in-loop filtering, and wherein the in-loop filtering is performed using modified values of reconstructed samples of the current video block.

7. The method of solution 4, wherein a logical false value of the usage status indicates that filtering samples in the block is allowed to utilize the information in the same block.

8. The method of solution 4, wherein, a logical true value of the usage status indicates the in-loop filtering is performed on reconstructed samples of the current video block without further modifying the reconstructed samples.

9. The method of any of solutions 4-8, wherein the condition specifies to set the usage status to the logical false value due to the coding tree block having a specific size.

10. The method of any of solutions 4-8, wherein the condition specifies to set the usage status to the logical false value due to the coding tree block having a size greater than a specific size.

11. The method of any of solutions 4-8 tree block having a size less than a specific size.

Section 4, item 3 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

12. The method of solution 5, wherein the condition depends on whether a bottom boundary of the current video block is a bottom boundary of a video unit that is smaller than the video picture or the bottom boundary of the current video block is a virtual boundary.

13. The method of solution 12, wherein the condition depends on whether a bottom boundary of the current video block is a bottom boundary of a slice or tile or brick boundary.

14. The method of solution 12, wherein the condition specifies to set the usage status to the logical true value when the bottom boundary of the current video block is a bottom boundary of a slice or tile or brick boundary.

15. The method of solution 4-12, wherein the condition specifies to set the usage status to the logical false value when the bottom boundary of the current video block is a bottom boundary of a picture boundary or outside the bottom boundary of a picture boundary.

Section 4, item 4 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

16. A method of video processing, comprising: determining, during a conversion between a video picture that is logically grouped into one or more video slices or video bricks, and a bitstream representation of the video picture, to disable a use of samples in another slice or brick in the adaptive loop filter process; and performing the conversion consistent with the determining

Section 4, item 5 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

17. A method of video processing, comprising: determining, during a conversion between a current video block of a video picture and a bitstream representation of the current video block, that the current video block includes samples located at a boundary of a video unit of the video picture; and performing the conversion based on the determining, wherein the performing the conversion includes generating virtual samples for an in-loop filtering process using a unified method that is same for all boundary types in the video picture.

18. The method of solution 17, wherein the video unit is a slice or tile or 360-degree video.

19. The method of solution 17, wherein the in-loop filtering includes adaptive loop filtering.

20. The method of any of solutions 17-19, wherein the unified method is a two-side padding method.

21. The method of any of solutions 17-20, wherein the unified method is when accessing samples below a first line is disallowed and padding is utilized to generate virtual samples for those below the first line, then accessing samples above a second line is also set to be disallowed and padding is utilized to generate virtual samples for those above the second line.

22. The method of any of solutions 17-20, wherein the unified method is when accessing samples above a first line is disallowed and padding is utilized to generate virtual samples for those above the first line, then accessing samples below a second line is also set to be disallowed and padding is utilized to generate virtual samples for those below the second line.

23. The method of any of solutions 21-22, wherein the distance between the first line and a current line where the current sample to be filtered is located and distance between the second line and the first line is equal.

Section 4, item 6 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

24. A method of video processing, comprising: determining to apply, during a conversion between a current video block of a video picture and a bitstream representation thereof, one of multiple adaptive loop filter (ALF) sample selection methods available for the video picture during the conversion; and performing the conversion by applying the one of multiple ALF sample selection methods.

25. The method of solution 24, wherein the multiple ALF sample selection methods include a first method in which samples are selected before an in-loop filter is applied to the current video block during the conversion and a second method in which samples are selected after an in-loop filter is applied to the current video block during the conversion.

Section 4, item 7 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

26. A method of video processing, comprising: performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule disables using samples that cross a virtual pipeline data unit (VPDU) of the video picture, andperformingtheconversionusingaresultofthein-loopfilteringoperation.

27. The method of solution 26, wherein the VPDU corresponds to a region of the video picture having a fixed size.

28. The method of any of solutions 26-27, wherein the boundary rule further specifies to use virtual samples for the in-loop filtering in place of disabled samples.

29. The method of solution 28, wherein the virtual samples are generated by padding.

Section 4, item 8 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

30. A method of video processing, comprising: performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule specifies to use, for locations of the current video block across a video unit boundary, samples that are generated without using padding; and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

31. The method of solution 30, wherein the samples are generated using a two-side padding technique.

32. The method of solution 30, wherein the in-loop filtering operation comprises using a same virtual sample generation technique for symmetrically located samples during the in-loop filtering operation.

33. The method of any of solutions 30-32, wherein the in-loop filtering operation over samples of the current video block includes performing reshaping of the samples of the current video block prior to applying the in-loop filtering.

Section 4, item 9 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

34. A method of video processing, comprising: performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule specifies selecting, for the in-loop filtering operation, a filter having dimensions such that samples of current video block used during the in-loop filtering do not cross a boundary of a video unit of the video picture; and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

Section 4, item 10 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

35. A method of video processing, comprising: performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule specifies selecting, for the in-loop filtering operation, clipping parameters or filter coefficients based on whether or not padded samples are needed for the in-loop filtering; and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

36. The method of solution 35, wherein the clipping parameters or filter coefficients are included in the bitstream representation.

Section 4, item 11 provides additional examples of the following solutions.

37. A method of video processing, comprising: performing, based on a boundary rule, an in-loop filtering operation over samples of a current video block of a video picture during a conversion between the current video block and a bitstream representation of a current video block; wherein the boundary rule depends on a color component identity of the current video block; and performing the conversion using a result of the in-loop filtering operation.

38. The method of solution 37, wherein the boundary rule is different for luma and/or different color components.

39. The method of any of solutions 1-38, wherein the conversion includes encoding the current video block into the bitstream representation.

40. The method of any of solutions 1-38, wherein the conversion includes decoding the bitstream representation to generate sample values of the current video block.

41. A video encoding apparatus comprising a processor configured to implement a method recited in any one or more of solutions 1-38.

42. A video decoding apparatus comprising a processor configured to implement a method recited in any one or more of solutions 1-38.

43. A computer-readable medium having code stored thereon, the code, upon execution by a processor, causing the processor to implement a method recited in any one or more of solutions 1-38.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an example video processing system 3100 in which various techniques disclosed herein may be implemented. Various implementations may include some or all of the components of the system 3100. The system 3100 may include input 3102 for receiving video content. The video content may be received in a raw or uncompressed format, e.g, 8 or 10 bit multi-component pixel values, or may be in a compressed or encoded format. The input 3102 may represent a network interface, a peripheral bus interface, or a storage interface. Examples of network interface include wired interfaces such as Ethernet, passive optical network (PON), etc. and wireless interfaces such as Wi-Fi or cellular interfaces.

The system 3100 may include a coding component 3104 that may implement the various coding or encoding methods described in the present document. The coding component 3104 may reduce the average bitrate of video from the input 3102 to the output of the coding component 3104 to produce a coded representation of the video. The coding techniques are therefore sometimes called video compression or video transcoding techniques. The output of the coding component 3104 may be either stored, or transmitted via a communication connected, as represented by the component 3106. The stored or communicated bitstream (or coded) representation of the video received at the input 3102 may be used by the component 3108 for generating pixel values or displayable video that is sent to a display interface 3110. The process of generating user-viewable video from the bitstream representation is sometimes called video decompression. Furthermore, while certain video processing operations are referred to as “coding” operations or tools, it will be appreciated that the coding tools or operations are used at an encoder and corresponding decoding tools or operations that reverse the results of the coding will be performed by a decoder.

Examples of a peripheral bus interface or a display interface may include universal serial bus (USB) or high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) or Displayport, and so on. Examples of storage interfaces include SATA (serial advanced technology attachment), PCI, IDE interface, and the like. The techniques described in the present document may be embodied in various electronic devices such as mobile phones, laptops, smartphones or other devices that are capable of performing digital data processing and/or video display.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart representation of a method 3200 for video processing in accordance with the present technology. The method 3200 includes, at operation 3210, determining, for a conversion between a current video unit of a video and a bitstream representation of the video, availability of one or more samples in a first neighboring region of the current block for a coding process of the conversion independently from information of a second neighboring region of the current block. The second neighboring region is adjacent to the first neighboring region. The one or more samples are padded in case determined to be unavailable. The coding process comprises an adaptive loop filter (ALF) tool that includes an ALF classification process and/or an ALF filtering process. The method 3200 also includes, at operation 3220, performing the conversion based on the determining.

In some embodiments, the first neighboring region comprises an above-left region of the current block, and wherein the second neighboring region comprises a region above the current block or a region positioned to the left of the current block. In some embodiments, the one or more samples in the above-left region are padded due to being unavailable for the coding process, and samples in the region above the current block are determined to be available for the coding process. In some embodiments, the one or more samples in the above-left region are available for the coding process, and samples in the region above the current block are padded due to being unavailable for the coding process.

In some embodiments, the first neighboring region comprises a below-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region below the current block or a region positioned to the right of the current block. In some embodiments, the first neighboring region comprises an above-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region above the current video unit or a region positioned to the right of the current block. In some embodiments, the first neighboring region comprises a below-left region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region below the current block or a region positioned to the left of the current block.

In some embodiments, the one or more samples in the first neighboring region are determined to be unavailable, and one or more samples in the second neighboring region are determined to be available in case the second neighboring region and the current block are in a same video unit. In some embodiments, the first neighboring region is an above-left or an above-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region is a region above the current block. In some embodiments, the first neighboring region is a below-left or a below-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region is a region below the current block. In some embodiments, the first neighboring region is an above-left or a below-left region of the current block, and the second neighboring region is a region to the left of the current block. In some embodiments, the first neighboring region is an above-right or a below-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region is a region to the right of the current block. In some embodiments, the current block comprises a coding tree unit.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart representation of a method 3300 for video processing in accordance with the present technology. The method 3300 includes, at operation 3310, determining, for a conversion between a current video unit of a video that and a bitstream representation of the video, that at least one sample in K regions is unavailable for a filtering operation in case (1) M of K representative samples in the K regions are in video units different than the current video unit, and (2) the filtering operation is disallowed to access samples across multiple video units of the video, where M and K are integers. The method 3300 also includes, at operation 3330, performing the conversion based on the determining.

In some embodiments, M=1 and K=2. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-left neighboring region and an above-right neighboring region of the current block. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-left neighboring region and a below-left neighboring region of the current block. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-right neighboring region and a below-right neighboring region of the current block. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises a below-left neighboring region and a below-right neighboring region of the current block.

In some embodiments, M=1, 2, or 3, and wherein K=3. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-left neighboring region, an above-right neighboring region, and a below-left neighboring region of the current block. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-left neighboring region, an above-right neighboring region, and a below-right neighboring region of the current block. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-right neighboring region, a below-left neighboring region, and a below-right neighboring region of the current block. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-left neighboring region, a below-left neighboring region, and a below-right neighboring region of the current block.

In some embodiments, M=1, 2, or 3, and wherein K=4. In some embodiments, the K neighboring regions comprises an above-left neighboring region, an above-right neighboring region, a below-left neighboring region, and a below-right neighboring region of the current block.

In some embodiments, the M representative samples are determined to be in the video units different than the current video unit based on examining N of the K representative samples, and where M≤N≤K. In some embodiments, N=M, and only the M representative samples of the K representative samples are examined. In some embodiments, in case M=1 and K=2, the K regions include an above-left neighboring region and an above-right neighboring region of the current video unit. In some embodiments, only samples in the above-left neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, only samples in the above-right neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, in case M=1 and K=2, the K regions include a below-left neighboring region and a below-right neighboring region of the current video unit. In some embodiments, only samples in the below-left neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, only samples in the below-right neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, in case M=1 and K=2, the K regions include an above-left neighboring region and a below-left neighboring region of the current video unit. In some embodiments, only samples in the above-left neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, only samples in the below-left neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, in case M=1 and K=2, the K regions include an above-right neighboring region and a below-right neighboring region of the current video unit. In some embodiments, only samples in the above-right neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, only samples in the below-right neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, in case M=1 and K=4, the K regions include an above-left neighboring region, an above-right neighboring region, a below-left neighboring region, and a below-right neighboring region of the current video unit. In some embodiments, only samples in the above-left neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, only samples in the above-right neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, only samples in the below-left neighboring region are examined. In some embodiments, only samples in the below-right neighboring region are examined.

In some embodiments, representative samples in a region are considered unavailable in case the region is located in a different slice than the current video unit and a syntax element indicates that the filtering operation is disallowed to access samples across different slices. In some embodiments, representative samples in a region are considered unavailable in case the region is located in a different brick than the current video unit and a syntax element indicates that the filtering operation is disallowed to access samples across different bricks. In some embodiments, representative samples in a region are considered unavailable in case the region is located in a different subpicture than the current video unit and a syntax element indicates that the filtering operation is disallowed to access samples across different subpictures.

In some embodiments, the conversion includes encoding the video into the bitstream representation. In some embodiments, the conversion includes decoding the bitstream representation into the video.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram that illustrates an example video coding system 100 that may utilize the techniques of this disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 34 , video coding system 100 may include a source device 110 and a destination device 120. Source device 110 generates encoded video data which may be referred to as a video encoding device. Destination device 120 may decode the encoded video data generated by source device 110 which may be referred to as a video decoding device.

Source device 110 may include a video source 112, a video encoder 114, and an input/output (I/O) interface 116.

Video source 112 may include a source such as a video capture device, an interface to receive video data from a video content provider, and/or a computer graphics system for generating video data, or a combination of such sources. The video data may comprise one or more pictures. Video encoder 114 encodes the video data from video source 112 to generate a bitstream. The bitstream may include a sequence of bits that form a coded representation of the video data. The bitstream may include coded pictures and associated data. The coded picture is a coded representation of a picture. The associated data may include sequence parameter sets, picture parameter sets, and other syntax structures. I/O interface 116 may include a modulator/demodulator (modem) and/or a transmitter. The encoded video data may be transmitted directly to destination device 120 via I/O interface 116 through network 130 a. The encoded video data may also be stored onto a storage medium/server 130 b for access by destination device 120.

Destination device 120 may include an I/O interface 126, a video decoder 124, and a display device 122.

I/O interface 126 may include a receiver and/or a modem. I/O interface 126 may acquire encoded video data from the source device 110 or the storage medium/server 130 b. Video decoder 124 may decode the encoded video data. Display device 122 may display the decoded video data to a user. Display device 122 may be integrated with the destination device 120, or may be external to destination device 120 which be configured to interface with an external display device.

Video encoder 114 and video decoder 124 may operate according to a video compression standard, such as the High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard, Versatile Video Coding (VVC) standard and other current and/or further standards.

FIG. 35 is a block diagram illustrating an example of video encoder 200, which may be video encoder 114 in the system 100 illustrated in FIG. 34 .

Video encoder 200 may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques of this disclosure. In the example of FIG. 35 , video encoder 200 includes a plurality of functional components. The techniques described in this disclosure may be shared among the various components of video encoder 200. In some examples, a processor may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques described in this disclosure.

The functional components of video encoder 200 may include a partition unit 201, a predication unit 202 which may include a mode select unit 203, a motion estimation unit 204, a motion compensation unit 205 and an intra prediction unit 206, a residual generation unit 207, a transform unit 208, a quantization unit 209, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform unit 211, a reconstruction unit 212, a buffer 213, and an entropy encoding unit 214.

In other examples, video encoder 200 may include more, fewer, or different functional components. In an example, predication unit 202 may include an intra block copy (IBC) unit. The IBC unit may perform predication in an IBC mode in which at least one reference picture is a picture where the current video block is located.

Furthermore, some components, such as motion estimation unit 204 and motion compensation unit 205 may be highly integrated, but are represented in the example of FIG. 35 separately for purposes of explanation.

Partition unit 201 may partition a picture into one or more video blocks. Video encoder 200 and video decoder 300 may support various video block sizes.

Mode select unit 203 may select one of the coding modes, intra or inter, e.g., based on error results, and provide the resulting intra- or inter-coded block to a residual generation unit 207 to generate residual block data and to a reconstruction unit 212 to reconstruct the encoded block for use as a reference picture. In some example, Mode select unit 203 may select a combination of intra and inter predication (CIIP) mode in which the predication is based on an inter predication signal and an intra predication signal. Mode select unit 203 may also select a resolution for a motion vector (e.g., a sub-pixel or integer pixel precision) for the block in the case of inter-predication.

To perform inter prediction on a current video block, motion estimation unit 204 may generate motion information for the current video block by comparing one or more reference frames from buffer 213 to the current video block. Motion compensation unit 205 may determine a predicted video block for the current video block based on the motion information and decoded samples of pictures from buffer 213 other than the picture associated with the current video block.

Motion estimation unit 204 and motion compensation unit 205 may perform different operations for a current video block, for example, depending on whether the current video block is in an I slice, a P slice, or a B slice.

In some examples, motion estimation unit 204 may perform uni-directional prediction for the current video block, and motion estimation unit 204 may search reference pictures of list 0 or list 1 for a reference video block for the current video block. Motion estimation unit 204 may then generate a reference index that indicates the reference picture in list 0 or list 1 that contains the reference video block and a motion vector that indicates a spatial displacement between the current video block and the reference video block. Motion estimation unit 204 may output the reference index, a prediction direction indicator, and the motion vector as the motion information of the current video block. Motion compensation unit 205 may generate the predicted video block of the current block based on the reference video block indicated by the motion information of the current video block.

In other examples, motion estimation unit 204 may perform bi-directional prediction for the current video block, motion estimation unit 204 may search the reference pictures in list 0 for a reference video block for the current video block and may also search the reference pictures in list 1 for another reference video block for the current video block. Motion estimation unit 204 may then generate reference indexes that indicate the reference pictures in list 0 and list 1 containing the reference video blocks and motion vectors that indicate spatial displacements between the reference video blocks and the current video block. Motion estimation unit 204 may output the reference indexes and the motion vectors of the current video block as the motion information of the current video block. Motion compensation unit 205 may generate the predicted video block of the current video block based on the reference video blocks indicated by the motion information of the current video block.

In some examples, motion estimation unit 204 may output a full set of motion information for decoding processing of a decoder.

In some examples, motion estimation unit 204 may do not output a full set of motion information for the current video. Rather, motion estimation unit 204 may signal the motion information of the current video block with reference to the motion information of another video block. For example, motion estimation unit 204 may determine that the motion information of the current video block is sufficiently similar to the motion information of a neighboring video block.

In one example, motion estimation unit 204 may indicate, in a syntax structure associated with the current video block, a value that indicates to the video decoder 300 that the current video block has the same motion information as the another video block.

In another example, motion estimation unit 204 may identify, in a syntax structure associated with the current video block, another video block and a motion vector difference (MVD). The motion vector difference indicates a difference between the motion vector of the current video block and the motion vector of the indicated video block. The video decoder 300 may use the motion vector of the indicated video block and the motion vector difference to determine the motion vector of the current video block.

As discussed above, video encoder 200 may predictively signal the motion vector. Two examples of predictive signaling techniques that may be implemented by video encoder 200 include advanced motion vector predication (AMVP) and merge mode signaling.

Intra prediction unit 206 may perform intra prediction on the current video block. When intra prediction unit 206 performs intra prediction on the current video block, intra prediction unit 206 may generate prediction data for the current video block based on decoded samples of other video blocks in the same picture. The prediction data for the current video block may include a predicted video block and various syntax elements.

Residual generation unit 207 may generate residual data for the current video block by subtracting (e.g., indicated by the minus sign) the predicted video block(s) of the current video block from the current video block. The residual data of the current video block may include residual video blocks that correspond to different sample components of the samples in the current video block.

In other examples, there may be no residual data for the current video block for the current video block, for example in a skip mode, and residual generation unit 207 may not perform the subtracting operation.

Transform processing unit 208 may generate one or more transform coefficient video blocks for the current video block by applying one or more transforms to a residual video block associated with the current video block.

After transform processing unit 208 generates a transform coefficient video block associated with the current video block, quantization unit 209 may quantize the transform coefficient video block associated with the current video block based on one or more quantization parameter (QP) values associated with the current video block.

Inverse quantization unit 210 and inverse transform unit 211 may apply inverse quantization and inverse transforms to the transform coefficient video block, respectively, to reconstruct a residual video block from the transform coefficient video block. Reconstruction unit 212 may add the reconstructed residual video block to corresponding samples from one or more predicted video blocks generated by the predication unit 202 to produce a reconstructed video block associated with the current block for storage in the buffer 213.

After reconstruction unit 212 reconstructs the video block, loop filtering operation may be performed reduce video blocking artifacts in the video block.

Entropy encoding unit 214 may receive data from other functional components of the video encoder 200. When entropy encoding unit 214 receives the data, entropy encoding unit 214 may perform one or more entropy encoding operations to generate entropy encoded data and output a bitstream that includes the entropy encoded data.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram illustrating an example of video decoder 300 which may be video decoder 114 in the system 100 illustrated in FIG. 34 .

The video decoder 300 may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques of this disclosure. In the example of FIG. 36 , the video decoder 300 includes a plurality of functional components. The techniques described in this disclosure may be shared among the various components of the video decoder 300. In some examples, a processor may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques described in this disclosure.

In the example of FIG. 36 , video decoder 300 includes an entropy decoding unit 301, a motion compensation unit 302, an intra prediction unit 303, an inverse quantization unit 304, an inverse transformation unit 305, and a reconstruction unit 306 and a buffer 307. Video decoder 300 may, in some examples, perform a decoding pass generally reciprocal to the encoding pass described with respect to video encoder 200 (e.g., FIG. 35 ).

Entropy decoding unit 301 may retrieve an encoded bitstream. The encoded bitstream may include entropy coded video data (e.g., encoded blocks of video data). Entropy decoding unit 301 may decode the entropy coded video data, and from the entropy decoded video data, motion compensation unit 302 may determine motion information including motion vectors, motion vector precision, reference picture list indexes, and other motion information. Motion compensation unit 302 may, for example, determine such information by performing the AMVP and merge mode.

Motion compensation unit 302 may produce motion compensated blocks, possibly performing interpolation based on interpolation filters. Identifiers for interpolation filters to be used with sub-pixel precision may be included in the syntax elements.

Motion compensation unit 302 may use interpolation filters as used by video encoder 20 during encoding of the video block to calculate interpolated values for sub-integer pixels of a reference block. Motion compensation unit 302 may determine the interpolation filters used by video encoder 200 according to received syntax information and use the interpolation filters to produce predictive blocks.

Motion compensation unit 302 may uses some of the syntax information to determine sizes of blocks used to encode frame(s) and/or slice(s) of the encoded video sequence, partition information that describes how each macroblock of a picture of the encoded video sequence is partitioned, modes indicating how each partition is encoded, one or more reference frames (and reference frame lists) for each inter-encoded block, and other information to decode the encoded video sequence.

Intra prediction unit 303 may use intra prediction modes for example received in the bitstream to form a prediction block from spatially adjacent blocks. Inverse quantization unit 303 inverse quantizes, i.e., de-quantizes, the quantized video block coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by entropy decoding unit 301. Inverse transform unit 303 applies an inverse transform.

Reconstruction unit 306 may sum the residual blocks with the corresponding prediction blocks generated by motion compensation unit 202 or intra-prediction unit 303 to form decoded blocks. If desired, a deblocking filter may also be applied to filter the decoded blocks in order to remove blockiness artifacts. The decoded video blocks are then stored in buffer 307, which provides reference blocks for subsequent motion compensation/intra predication and also produces decoded video for presentation on a display device.

From the foregoing, it will be appreciated that specific embodiments of the presently disclosed technology have been described herein for purposes of illustration, but that various modifications may be made without deviating from the scope of the invention. Accordingly, the presently disclosed technology is not limited except as by the appended claims.

Some embodiments of the disclosed technology include making a decision or determination to enable a video processing tool or mode. In an example, when the video processing tool or mode is enabled, the encoder will use or implement the tool or mode in the processing of a block of video, but may not necessarily modify the resulting bitstream based on the usage of the tool or mode. That is, a conversion from the block of video to the bitstream representation of the video will use the video processing tool or mode when it is enabled based on the decision or determination. In another example, when the video processing tool or mode is enabled, the decoder will process the bitstream with the knowledge that the bitstream has been modified based on the video processing tool or mode. That is, a conversion from the bitstream representation of the video to the block of video will be performed using the video processing tool or mode that was enabled based on the decision or determination.

Some embodiments of the disclosed technology include making a decision or determination to disable a video processing tool or mode. In an example, when the video processing tool or mode is disabled, the encoder will not use the tool or mode in the conversion of the block of video to the bitstream representation of the video. In another example, when the video processing tool or mode is disabled, the decoder will process the bitstream with the knowledge that the bitstream has not been modified using the video processing tool or mode that was enabled based on the decision or determination.

Implementations of the subject matter and the functional operations described in this patent document can be implemented in various systems, digital electronic circuitry, or in computer software, firmware, or hardware, including the structures disclosed in this specification and their structural equivalents, or in combinations of one or more of them. Implementations of the subject matter described in this specification can be implemented as one or more computer program products, e.g., one or more modules of computer program instructions encoded on a tangible and non-transitory computer readable medium for execution by, or to control the operation of, data processing apparatus. The computer readable medium can be a machine-readable storage device, a machine-readable storage substrate, a memory device, a composition of matter effecting a machine-readable propagated signal, or a combination of one or more of them. The term “data processing unit” or “data processing apparatus” encompasses all apparatus, devices, and machines for processing data, including by way of example a programmable processor, a computer, or multiple processors or computers. The apparatus can include, in addition to hardware, code that creates an execution environment for the computer program in question, e.g., code that constitutes processor firmware, a protocol stack, a database management system, an operating system, or a combination of one or more of them.

A computer program (also known as a program, software, software application, script, or code) can be written in any form of programming language, including compiled or interpreted languages, and it can be deployed in any form, including as a stand-alone program or as a module, component, subroutine, or other unit suitable for use in a computing environment. A computer program does not necessarily correspond to a file in a file system. A program can be stored in a portion of a file that holds other programs or data (e.g., one or more scripts stored in a markup language document), in a single file dedicated to the program in question, or in multiple coordinated files (e.g., files that store one or more modules, sub programs, or portions of code). A computer program can be deployed to be executed on one computer or on multiple computers that are located at one site or distributed across multiple sites and interconnected by a communication network.

The processes and logic flows described in this specification can be performed by one or more programmable processors executing one or more computer programs to perform functions by operating on input data and generating output. The processes and logic flows can also be performed by, and apparatus can also be implemented as, special purpose logic circuitry, e.g., an FPGA (field programmable gate array) or an ASIC (application specific integrated circuit).

Processors suitable for the execution of a computer program include, by way of example, both general and special purpose microprocessors, and any one or more processors of any kind of digital computer. Generally, a processor will receive instructions and data from a read only memory or a random access memory or both. The essential elements of a computer are a processor for performing instructions and one or more memory devices for storing instructions and data. Generally, a computer will also include, or be operatively coupled to receive data from or transfer data to, or both, one or more mass storage devices for storing data, e.g., magnetic, magneto optical disks, or optical disks. However, a computer need not have such devices. Computer readable media suitable for storing computer program instructions and data include all forms of nonvolatile memory, media and memory devices, including by way of example semiconductor memory devices, e.g., EPROM, EEPROM, and flash memory devices. The processor and the memory can be supplemented by, or incorporated in, special purpose logic circuitry.

It is intended that the specification, together with the drawings, be considered exemplary only, where exemplary means an example. As used herein, the use of “or” is intended to include “and/or”, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

While this patent document contains many specifics, these should not be construed as limitations on the scope of any invention or of what may be claimed, but rather as descriptions of features that may be specific to particular embodiments of particular inventions. Certain features that are described in this patent document in the context of separate embodiments can also be implemented in combination in a single embodiment. Conversely, various features that are described in the context of a single embodiment can also be implemented in multiple embodiments separately or in any suitable subcombination. Moreover, although features may be described above as acting in certain combinations and even initially claimed as such, one or more features from a claimed combination can in some cases be excised from the combination, and the claimed combination may be directed to a sub combination or variation of a subcombination. Similarly, while operations are depicted in the drawings in a particular order, this should not be understood as requiring that such operations be performed in the particular order shown or in sequential order, or that all illustrated operations be performed, to achieve desirable results. Moreover, the separation of various system components in the embodiments described in this patent document should not be understood as requiring such separation in all embodiments.

Only a few implementations and examples are described and other implementations, enhancements and variations can be made based on what is described and illustrated in this patent document. 

The invention claimed is:
 1. A method of processing video data, comprising: determining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, availability of one or more samples in a first neighboring region of the current block for a coding process of the conversion independently from information of a second neighboring region of the current block, wherein the second neighboring region is adjacent to the first neighboring region, and wherein the coding process comprises an adaptive loop filter tool that includes an adaptive loop filter classification process and/or an adaptive loop filtering process, performing a padding process on the one or more samples in case that the one or more samples are determined to be unavailable; and performing the conversion based on the determining and padded samples, if any, wherein the first neighboring region comprises an above-left region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region above the current block or a region positioned to the left of the current block, and wherein when a top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the above-left region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on an above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and a left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, or wherein the first neighboring region comprises a below-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region below the current block or a region positioned to the right of the current block, and wherein when a bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the below-right region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on a below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and a right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein based on the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag, the above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and the left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the above-left region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block being not exceed the above horizontal boundary or the left vertical boundary.
 3. The method of claim 2, wherein the one or more samples in the above-left region are unavailable due to the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag being equal to true which depends on that the above-left region is located in a video unit different from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed.
 4. The method of claim 3, wherein the video unit is a slice.
 5. The method of claim 1, wherein based on the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag, the below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and the right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the below-right region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block being not exceed the below horizontal boundary or the right vertical boundary.
 6. The method of claim 5, wherein the one or more samples in the below-right region are unavailable due to the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag being equal to true which depends on that the below-right region is located in a video unit different from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed.
 7. The method of claim 6, wherein the video unit is a slice.
 8. The method of claim 1, wherein the conversion includes encoding the video into the bitstream.
 9. The method of claim 1, wherein the conversion includes decoding the video from the bitstream.
 10. An apparatus for processing video data comprising a processor and a non-transitory memory with instructions thereon, wherein the instructions upon execution by the processor, cause the processor to: determine, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, availability of one or more samples in a first neighboring region of the current block for a coding process of the conversion independently from information of a second neighboring region of the current block, wherein the second neighboring region is adjacent to the first neighboring region, wherein the coding process comprises an adaptive loop filter tool that includes an adaptive loop filter classification process and/or an adaptive loop filtering process, perform a padding process on the one or more samples in case that the one or more samples are determined to be unavailable; and perform the conversion based on the determining and padded samples, if any, wherein the first neighboring region comprises an above-left region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region above the current block or a region positioned to the left of the current block, and wherein when a top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the above-left region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on an above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and a left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, or wherein the first neighboring region comprises a below-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region below the current block or a region positioned to the right of the current block, and wherein when a bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the below-right region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on a below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and a right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos.
 11. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein based on the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag, the above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and the left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the above-left region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block being not exceed the above horizontal boundary or the left vertical boundary; wherein the one or more samples in the above-left region are unavailable due to the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag being equal to true which depends on that the above-left region is located in a video unit different from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed; wherein the video unit is a slice.
 12. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein based on the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag, the below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and the right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the below-right region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block being not exceed the below horizontal boundary or the right vertical boundary; wherein the one or more samples in the below-right region are unavailable due to the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag being equal to true which depends on that the below-right region is located in a different video unit from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed; wherein the video unit is a slice.
 13. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that cause a processor to: determine, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, availability of one or more samples in a first neighboring region of the current block for a coding process of the conversion independently from information of a second neighboring region of the current block, wherein the second neighboring region is adjacent to the first neighboring region, wherein the coding process comprises an adaptive loop filter tool that includes an adaptive loop filter classification process and/or an adaptive loop filtering process, perform a padding process on the one or more samples in case that the one or more samples are determined to be unavailable; and perform the conversion based on the determining and padded samples, if any, wherein the first neighboring region comprises an above-left region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region above the current block or a region positioned to the left of the current block, and wherein when a top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the above-left region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on an above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and a left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, or wherein the first neighboring region comprises a below-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region below the current block or a region positioned to the right of the current block, and wherein when a bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the below-right region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on a below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and a right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos.
 14. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of claim 13, wherein based on the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag, the above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and the left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the above-left region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block being not exceed the above horizontal boundary or the left vertical boundary; wherein the one or more samples in the above-left region are unavailable due to the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag being equal to true which depends on that the above-left region is located in a video unit different from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed; wherein the video unit is a slice; wherein based on the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag, the below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and the right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the below-right region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block being not exceed the below horizontal boundary or the right vertical boundary; wherein the one or more samples in the below-right region are unavailable due to the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag being equal to true which depends on that the below-right region is located in a different video unit from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed; wherein the video unit is a slice.
 15. A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by a video processing apparatus, wherein the method comprises: determining, for a current block of the video, availability of one or more samples in a first neighboring region of the current block for a coding process of a conversion between the current block and the bitstream independently from information of a second neighboring region of the current block, wherein the second neighboring region is adjacent to the first neighboring region, wherein the coding process comprises an adaptive loop filter tool that includes an adaptive loop filter classification process and/or an adaptive loop filtering process, performing a padding process on the one or more samples in case that the one or more samples are determined to be unavailable; and generating the bitstream based on the determining and padded samples, if any, wherein the first neighboring region comprises an above-left region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region above the current block or a region positioned to the left of the current block, and wherein when a top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the above-left region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on an above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and a left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, or wherein the first neighboring region comprises a below-right region of the current block, and the second neighboring region comprises a region below the current block or a region positioned to the right of the current block, and wherein when a bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag is equal to true, one or more samples in the below-right region are determined to be unavailable, and whether one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block are determined to be unavailable or not is based on a below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and a right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos.
 16. The non-transitory computer-readable recording medium of claim 15, wherein based on the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag, the above horizontal boundary position variable clipTopPos and the left vertical boundary position variable clipLeftPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the above-left region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region above the current block or the region positioned to the left of the current block being not exceed the above horizontal boundary or the left vertical boundary; wherein the one or more samples in the above-left region are unavailable due to the top-left clip flag clipTopLeftFlag being equal to true which depends on that the above-left region is located in a video unit different from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed; wherein the video unit is a slice; wherein based on the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag, the below horizontal boundary position variable clipBottomPos and the right vertical boundary position variable clipRightPos, it is allowed that the padding process is performed on the one or more samples in the below-right region due to the one or more samples being unavailable for the coding process, and the padding process is not performed on the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block due to the one or more samples in the region below the current block or the region positioned to the right of the current block being not exceed the below horizontal boundary or the right vertical boundary; wherein the one or more samples in the below-right region are unavailable due to the bottom-right clip flag clipBottomRightFlag being equal to true which depends on that the below-right region is located in a different video unit from the current block and the coding process using samples across the video unit is disallowed; wherein the video unit is a slice. 